tek-care nc300 ii microprocessor nurse call system ul ... · pdf filetek-care®...

128
www.tektone.com Phone: (828) 524-9967 Toll-Free: (800) 327-8466 Tech Support: Option 2 Sales: Option 3 277 Industrial Park Road Franklin, NC 28734 [email protected] Fax: (828) 524-9968 Tek-CARE ® NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ® 1069 Listed Operation, Installation and Service Manual Operating Software: TekNIOS II The Tek-CARE ® NC300 II Series Nurse Call System is designed for hospitals, nursing homes and congregate living centers. It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide communications between facility staff and patients, as well as an array of information system features and tools. Specific system components are supervised for reliable operation. IL715 SECTION E Rev. 17 - 05/2011 www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Upload: doanque

Post on 22-Mar-2018

219 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

www.tektone.com

Phone: (828) 524-9967Toll-Free: (800) 327-8466Tech Support: Option 2Sales: Option 3

277 Industrial Park RoadFranklin, NC [email protected]: (828) 524-9968

Tek-CARE® NC300™IIMicroprocessor

Nurse Call System

UL® 1069 Listed

Operation, Installation and Service Manual

Operating Software: TekNIOS™ II

The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Series Nurse Call System is designed for hospitals, nursinghomes and congregate living centers. It utilizes microprocessor based technology to providecommunications between facility staff and patients, as well as an array of informationsystem features and tools. Specific system components are supervised for reliable operation.

IL715SECTION ERev. 17 - 05/2011

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 2: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

ii • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Operating Software: TekNIOS™ II

The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may beused only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

Operation, Installation and Service ManualCopyright © 2001–2011 TekTone® Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc., All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be copied without the express written permission of TekTone®

Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. The content of this manual is furnished for informational useonly, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment byTekTone® Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. TekTone® Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. assumes noresponsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this documentation.

TekTone, the TekTone logo, Tek-Call, Tek-Care, Tek-Check-In, Tek-Com, Tek-Digicare,Tek-Door, Tek-Entry III, Tek-Guard, Tek-Micro, Tek-Micro II, Tek-MMARS II,TekNIOS, TekNIOS II, Tek-Paging, Tek-Phone, Tek-Safe, Tek-Select II, Tek-Sentry,Tek-Sound, Tek-Status, Tek-Trio and Tek-View are either registered trademarks or trademarksof TekTone® Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Allother trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

TekTone® Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc., 277 Industrial Park Road, Franklin, North Carolina28734, USA.

Tek-CARE® NC300™IIMicroprocessor Nurse Call System

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 3: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • iiiCopyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

System Introduction ........................................................................................................ xA Word about ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) ................................................................xi

Part 1 — System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions .................................................................................... 1

NC304 Master Station Controls and Indicators ...................................................... 1NC304 Master Station Connections ........................................................................ 2NC306 Master Station Controls and Indicators ........................................................ 3NC306 Master Station Connections ......................................................................... 5NC313 VGA Monitor Controls and Indicators .......................................................... 5NC315 LCD VGA Monitor Controls and Indicators .................................................. 8NC304, NC304LCD Master Operation ....................................................................... 9

Answer a Call Automatically ............................................................................. 9Answer a Call Selectively .................................................................................. 9Place a Call ......................................................................................................... 9Place a Call to Another Master Station ............................................................ 10Receive a Call from Another Master Station .................................................... 10Request or Cancel Nurse/Aide Service ........................................................... 10Request or Cancel Stat Service ........................................................................ 10Page a Zone ..................................................................................................... 10Page All Assigned Zones ................................................................................ 11Page Nurse/Aide by Presence Registration ..................................................... 11Page All Stations on the System ...................................................................... 11Use Room Monitoring ..................................................................................... 11Use Nurse/Aide Follower ................................................................................ 12Taking the Master Station Offline .................................................................... 12Bringing the Master Station Online ................................................................. 13Radio Paging Operation ................................................................................... 13Event Printing .................................................................................................. 13View Station Information ................................................................................. 13

NC306 Master Operation ........................................................................................ 13Answer a Call Automatically ........................................................................... 14Answer a Call Selectively ................................................................................ 14Place a Call ....................................................................................................... 14Place a Call to Another Master Station ............................................................ 14Receive a Call from Another Master Station .................................................... 14Request or Cancel Staff Service ....................................................................... 15Display Staff Presence and Service Requests ................................................. 15Request or Cancel Stat Service ........................................................................ 15Page a Zone ..................................................................................................... 15Page All Assigned Zones; Page All Zones ...................................................... 15Page Staff by Presence Registration ................................................................ 15Use Staff Follower ........................................................................................... 15Taking the Master Station Offline .................................................................... 16Bringing the Master Station Online ................................................................. 16Radio Paging Operation ................................................................................... 16Event Printing .................................................................................................. 16

IR301-series, IR302-series, IR311-series, IR312-series, IR318-series, IR319-series,IR320-series, SF380-series Patient Station Operation ...................................... 17

IR310-series Staff and IR315-series Duty Station Operation ................................... 21SF337C Water Resistant Pull/Pull Cord Bath Station Operation ............................. 22SF340B and SF381 Pull/Pull Cord Bath Station Operation ...................................... 22

Table of Contents

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 4: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

iv • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

SF341B and SF382 Code Call Station Operation ..................................................... 22SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station Operation .................................................... 23SF250 Staff Presence Station Operation ................................................................. 23LI380, LI384A, LI386-series Dome/Zone Light Operation ....................................... 24

System Configuration and Programming ................................................................... 25Configuration and Programming using NC304, NC304LCD Master Stations .......... 25

Main Menu ...................................................................................................... 261 View System Settings ............................................................................. 262 Reconfiguration ..................................................................................... 263 System Functions .................................................................................. 264 System Diagnostics ............................................................................... 265 Execute a Custom Page .......................................................................... 266 Enable PS/2 Keyboard ........................................................................... 267 Initiate Locator Link ............................................................................... 268 Master Instant Messaging .................................................................... 269 Master Call Transfer .............................................................................. 260 MSTR/TI Fault Tone Off ....................................................................... 26

View Menus ..................................................................................................... 271 View Remote Stations ............................................................................ 272 View Master Station ............................................................................... 273 View a Zone ........................................................................................... 27

Reconfiguration ............................................................................................... 271 Program Master ..................................................................................... 272 Program Station ..................................................................................... 273 Transmit Database ................................................................................. 274 Program Pager/Print ............................................................................... 275 Set Password Levels .............................................................................. 276 Set Username/Password ........................................................................ 277 Enable Bedout Call ................................................................................ 278 Alternate Dialing .................................................................................... 279 Program Roving Phone .......................................................................... 28

System Functions ............................................................................................ 281 Set Time & Date ..................................................................................... 282 Enter Timeout for Overtimes .................................................................. 283 Monitoring ............................................................................................ 284 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time ......................................................................... 285 Reboot Entire System ............................................................................ 286 Restore Local Database ......................................................................... 287 Detect System Stations .......................................................................... 288 Restore System Defaults ....................................................................... 28

Diagnostics Menu ........................................................................................... 291 View System Masters ............................................................................. 292 View Station Poll Cycle .......................................................................... 293 About Software Versions ....................................................................... 295 Check Dialing Method ........................................................................... 29

Master Programming ....................................................................................... 291 Set Master ID ......................................................................................... 292 Key Press Tones On/Off ........................................................................ 293 Toggle Pre-Announce Tones ................................................................. 294 Assign Master Zones ............................................................................ 295 Assign Call Responses .......................................................................... 296 Offline Data to Central ........................................................................... 29

Table of Contents

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 5: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • vCopyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Table of Contents

Station Programming ....................................................................................... 291 Program Room ID................................................................................... 292 Station On/Offline .................................................................................. 303 Station Privacy On/Off .......................................................................... 304 Station Paging On/Off ........................................................................... 305 Program Custom Label 1 ........................................................................ 306 Program Custom Label 2 ........................................................................ 307 Program Station Zones .......................................................................... 308 Station Priority ....................................................................................... 309 Duty Station Call Response ................................................................... 30

Pager Menu ..................................................................................................... 301 Pager Zone/Call Settings ....................................................................... 302 Assign Pagers to Rooms ....................................................................... 303 Local Printing Only ................................................................................ 304 Local Paging Only ................................................................................. 305 Central Paging/Local Prn ....................................................................... 306 Transmit Resets to Pagers ..................................................................... 317 Enable Extended Printing ....................................................................... 31

Dialing Methods .............................................................................................. 311 Normal Dialing ....................................................................................... 312 3-Digit Dialing ........................................................................................ 313 4-Digit Dialing ........................................................................................ 31

Keyboard Functions ........................................................................................ 32NC304 series & NC351(A) series Software Component Upgrades .................. 33Station Database Functions ............................................................................ 34

1 Global Status Change ............................................................................ 372 Global Privacy Change .......................................................................... 373 Global Paging Change ........................................................................... 374 Global Zoning Change ........................................................................... 375 Global Response Change ....................................................................... 376 Global Priority Change ........................................................................... 377 Global Dome Commands ........................................................................ 388 Global Call Declaration .......................................................................... 389 Global Message Assgmnts .................................................................... 39

Configuration and Programming using NC306 Master Stations ............................. 40Station Privacy ................................................................................................ 40

Show a Remote Station’s Privacy ............................................................. 40Set a Remote Station’s Privacy On/Off ..................................................... 40Show All Remote Stations with Privacy On .............................................. 40

Station Paging On/Off ..................................................................................... 40Station Priority ................................................................................................. 40

Show a Remote Station’s Priority ............................................................. 40Change a Remote Station’s Priority .......................................................... 40Show All Personal Attention and Priority Remote Stations ...................... 40

Program Station Zones .................................................................................... 40Show a Remote Station’s Zones ............................................................... 40Set a Remote Station’s Zones ................................................................... 41

Station On/Offline ............................................................................................ 41Assign Master Zones ...................................................................................... 41Master Station Key-Press Tones On/Off ......................................................... 41Toggle Pre-Announce Tones .......................................................................... 41Master Station Guidance LEDs On/Off ........................................................... 41

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 6: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

vi • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

System Radio Paging Mode ............................................................................ 42Set System Time & Date .................................................................................. 42Reboot Entire System ...................................................................................... 42Restore Local Database ................................................................................... 42Detect System Stations ................................................................................... 42Restore System Defaults ................................................................................. 42

Programming Pagers and Remote Stations with the NC306 Master Station ........... 43Radio Pager Programming ................................................................................ 43Station Programming ....................................................................................... 43Set Point Limits ................................................................................................ 45

NC306 series Software Component Upgrades ........................................................ 45

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation ..................................................................................................... 46

Problems to Avoid ................................................................................................. 47Equipment Descriptions, Requirements and Locations ......................................... 47

NC351(A) and NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment ............................................ 47PK304 Master Station Power Supply ............................................................. 48NC304, NC304LCD and NC306 Master Station ........................................... 48NC315 LCD/NC313 VGA Monitor ............................................................... 48IR3xx-series Stations—General Information .................................................... 48IR300-series Multipurpose Station .................................................................. 49IR019C Remote Speaker/Microphone Station .................................................. 49IR301-series Single, IR302-series Dual Patient Stations ................................... 49SF380-series Single Patient Station ................................................................. 49IR311-series Single, IR312-series Dual Patient Stations ................................... 49IR319-series Single, IR320-series Dual Patient Stations ................................... 50PM311C/PM312C Pillow Speaker Intercom Modules ...................................... 50PM321B/PM322B Light Control Modules ....................................................... 50RY350B Multi-Channel Relay .......................................................................... 50RY351B Hill-Rom® SideCom® Adapter ............................................................. 50IR310-series Staff Station ................................................................................ 51IR315-series Duty Station ................................................................................ 51Call Cords ........................................................................................................ 51LI380 Dome Light ............................................................................................ 52LI384A Supervised Dome Light ....................................................................... 52LI386-series Dome/Zone Light ........................................................................ 52SF Series Peripheral Devices—General Information ........................................ 52SF337C Water Resistant Bath Station .............................................................. 52SF340B Bath Station ........................................................................................ 53SF381 Standalone Bath Station ....................................................................... 53SF341B Supervised Code Call Station ............................................................. 53SF382 Standalone Code Call Station ................................................................ 53SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station .............................................................. 53SF250 Staff Presence Station ........................................................................... 53

Wiring Installation .................................................................................................. 54Equipment Configuration and Settings ................................................................... 55

NC304 and NC304LCD Master Station ............................................................ 55NC306 Master Station ...................................................................................... 56NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment .................................................. 56IR3xx-series Stations ........................................................................................ 57IR315-series Duty Station ................................................................................ 57

Table of Contents

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 7: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • viiCopyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Table of Contents

SF380A Single Patient Station ......................................................................... 58SF380C Single Patient Station .......................................................................... 58SF380P Single Patient Station .......................................................................... 58SF381 Standalone Bath Station/SF382 Standalone Code Station .................... 58PM352 Station Port Card ................................................................................. 58PM353 Processor Card .................................................................................... 58PM354 Master Port Card ................................................................................. 58

System Test Instructions ............................................................................................. 59System Maintenance Instructions ............................................................................... 60

NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station .......................................................... 60NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 ........................................................................................ 60IR301-series, IR302-series, IR319-series, IR320-series or

SF380-series Patient Station ............................................................................ 60IR311-series or IR312-series Patient Station ........................................................... 60LI380, LI384A and LI386-series Dome/Zone Lights ................................................ 61PK305/A Supplemental Power Supply Upgrade ..................................................... 61PM352 Station Port Card Upgrade .......................................................................... 61PM354 Master Port Card Upgrade .......................................................................... 61Replacement Part Numbers ..................................................................................... 62Upgrade Part Numbers ............................................................................................ 62

System Troubleshooting Guide .................................................................................... 63General Troubleshooting Techniques .................................................................... 63System Event Logging ............................................................................................ 63Voltage Readings .................................................................................................... 64

Master Station Connections ............................................................................ 64Patient Station Connections ............................................................................ 65Standalone Bath and Code Station Connections ............................................ 67

Symptoms and Suggestions ................................................................................... 67Code Fault Indication (SF341B) ....................................................................... 67Comm. Fault Indication (patient station fault) ................................................. 67Data or Polling Noise ....................................................................................... 67IR019C has no audio communications ............................................................. 67IR3xx-series Patient Station is not placing calls ............................................... 67IR3xx-series Patient Station has a constant “Cord Out” message ................... 67IR3xx-series Patient Station that has been installed

is not recognized by the system .................................................................. 68IR310-series Staff Station is placing “Routine Calls” ...................................... 68IR315-series Duty Station or LI386/A/B/C Dome/Zone Lamp

is not annunciating calls .............................................................................. 68POLLING PROCESSOR FAIL indication .......................................................... 68Lamp Fault Indication ...................................................................................... 68LI380-series Lamp is not lighting ..................................................................... 68MASTER FAILURE(S) indication .................................................................... 68NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station has no audio

communications to all patient stations ........................................................ 69NC304 or NC304 LCD Master Station is making a squealing

noise and has erratic LED activity ............................................................... 69NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station is not displaying calls

or is not handling calls as intended ............................................................. 69NC304LCD or NC313 Monitor is displaying

incorrect call data ......................................................................................... 69

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 8: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

viii • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NC306 Talk LED continues to flash after CE has booted(CE LED flashing) ......................................................................................... 69

NC315/NC313 Monitor is not displaying VGA signal ...................................... 69NC315/NC313 Monitor power indicator is amber ............................................ 69NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment makes a loud buzzing

noise shortly after power up (internal relay is chattering) ........................... 69Pillow Speaker Intercom is not working and

audio is coming from the patient station ...................................................... 70CENTRAL PROCESSOR FAIL indication at a

single master location .................................................................................. 70SF337C or SF340B Bath Stations not placing calls .......................................... 70SF341B Code Station is not placing calls ........................................................ 70SF381 Standalone Bath Station or SF382 Standalone

Code Station is not placing calls ................................................................. 70SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station is not registering

or is not working correctly ........................................................................... 71SF250 Staff Presence Station is not registering or is not working correctly .... 71

Event Printing (Sample) ............................................................................................... 72Menu Map (Figure 17) ................................................................................................. 73System Programming Sheets (Port 1 through Port 8) ............................................... 74

Illustrations & Wiring DiagramsFigure 1 — NC304LCD Master Station ..................................................................... 1Figure 2 — NC304 Master Station (rear view of cabinet) ......................................... 2Figure 2a — NC306 Master Station ............................................................................. 3Figure 2b — NC306 Master Station (rear view of cabinet) ......................................... 5Figure 3 — NC313 VGA Monitor ............................................................................. 5Figure 3a — NC315 LCD VGA Monitor .................................................................... 8Figure 4 — IR301-series Single Patient Station ......................................................... 17Figure 5 — IR302-series Dual Patient Station ........................................................... 17Figure 6 — IR311-series Single Patient Station ......................................................... 17Figure 7 — IR312-series Dual Patient Station ........................................................... 18Figure 8 — IR318-series Single Patient Station ......................................................... 18Figure 8a — SF380-series Single Patient Station ........................................................ 18Figure 8b — IR319-series Single Patient Station ......................................................... 18Figure 8c — IR320-series Dual Patient Station ........................................................... 19Figure 9 — SF301 and SF302 Call Cords ................................................................... 20Figure 10 — SF311 and SF312 Call Cords ................................................................... 20Figure 10a — SF401 Call Cord ...................................................................................... 20Figure 11 — SF301P/SF401P, SF301PI2L/SF401P2L, SF301DIG/SF401DIG,

SF41ZDL and SF41ZKAL Pillow Speakers ......................................... 20Figure 12 — IR310-series Staff Station ....................................................................... 21Figure 13 — IR315-series Duty Station ....................................................................... 22Figure 14 — SF337C Water Resistant Pull/Pull Cord Bath Station .............................. 22Figure 15 — SF341B and SF382 Code Call Station ...................................................... 23Figure 16 — SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station ..................................................... 23Figure 16a — SF250 Staff Presence Station .................................................................. 24Figure 17 — Menu Map .........................................................................................25, 73Figure 18 — Offline Programming Map Reference ...................................................... 36Figure 19 — Mounting IR Series Stations .................................................................. 49Figure 20 — Mounting LI380, LI384A, LI386-series Dome/Zone Lights .................... 51

Table of Contents

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 9: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • ixCopyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Table of Contents

Figure 21 — Mounting SF Series Stations .................................................................. 52Figure 22 — NC304 and NC304LCD Potentiometers Functions .................................. 55Figure 22a — NC306 Dipswitches and Jumper Settings ............................................... 56Figure 22b — NC306 Potentiometer Functions ............................................................. 56Figure 23 — IR3xx-series Stations Dipswitch Location and Switch Values ................. 57Figure 24 — IR315-series Duty Station Layout ........................................................... 57Figure 25 — Tek-CARE® NC300™II Block Wiring Diagram ......................................... 90Figure 26 — Tek-CARE® NC300™II System Connection Diagram ............................... 91Figure 27 — NC304/NC306 Block Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 92Figure 28 — NC351(A) Wiring Diagram Using Individual Cables ............................... 93Figure 29 — NC304, NC304LCD, NC306 Wiring to Central Equipment ....................... 94Figure 30 — Connector Circuit Interconnections for Addressable Stations ............... 95Figure 31 — IR3xx-series Connections to Peripheral Devices ..................................... 96Figure 32 — IR3xx-series Connections with Supervised Dome Light ........................ 97Figure 33 — LI386-series Dome/Zone Light Wiring Diagram ...................................... 98Figure 34 — RY351B Wiring Diagram.......................................................................... 99Figure 35 — RY350B Wiring Diagram........................................................................ 100Figure 36 — PM321B/PM322B Lamp Module Wiring Diagram ................................. 101Figure 37 — LI384A Multiple Stations ...................................................................... 102Figure 38 — 6 & 7-PIN Connector Outputs for IR3xx-series Stations ....................... 103Figure 39 — NC351(A) Serial Connection Diagram ................................................... 104Figure 40 — NC351/2 Internal Hardware Diagram ..................................................... 105Figure 40a — NC351(A)/2 Internal Hardware Diagram ............................................... 106Figure 41 — NC351(A)/2 Expanded System Exploded Internal Wiring Diagram ....... 107Figure 42 — PM352 and PM354 Jumper Settings ..................................................... 108Figure 43 — SF380C Connections to Peripheral Devices .......................................... 109Figure 44 — SF380P Connections to Peripheral Devices .......................................... 110Figure 45 — SF381/SF382 Wiring Diagram ............................................................... 111Figure 46 — Keypad for NC306 ................................................................................ 112Figure 47 — SF380A Wiring Diagram ........................................................................ 113Figure 48 — LI484LED Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 114Figure 49 — LI380LED Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 115Figure 50 — LI386LED Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 116

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 10: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

x • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call System is a supervised microprocessor-based nursecall system that provides a complete range of two-way audio and visual signaling combinedwith programmable system configuration and information tools. These functions permiteasy communication between facility staff and patients, as well as between staff members.

The master station and VGA monitor comprise the nursing control station where the patientcalls are registered and displayed in order of priority and time of origin. The control stationprovides features to monitor staff as well as all patient call activity with an easy to useinterface for programming the master, system and remote station configurations. Thesefeatures will be reviewed in greater detail in the System Operating Instructions and Sys-tem Configuration and Programming sections.

The system is completed by a variety of patient stations and peripheral devices to meet allstaff and patient needs. The equipment uses a simplified wiring scheme and plug-in modu-lar components, allowing them to be expanded and interchanged as needed in existing andnew facilities.

System Introduction

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 11: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • xiCopyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

What Is It? Static electricity is a result of triboelectric charging of two dissimilar noncon-ductive materials that are rubbed together, such as rubbing your feet on a carpet on a coldwinter day or in a dry climate. The resulting charge is detected when you reach out to toucha doorknob or some other metallic object. The resulting discharge may only be startling or,in severe cases, it may even be painful. The actual electrical charge is dependant on thematerials being rubbed together, humidity, the rate of separation, and other factors.

What Can It Do? While this effect may be disturbing to humans, the effect on electronicequipment is often more serious, ranging from operational disruption to actual componentdamage. These effects result from the high voltages that may be developed. The simple actof walking across a carpet may develop as much as 30,000 volts, and changing a bed sheetmay create a charge of 100,000 volts or more. Such voltages readily cause arcing (the sparkthat can be observed when you grab a doorknob after walking across a carpet, etc.). Thearcing is evidence of the discharge path. Due to the high voltage involved, the dischargecurrent can jump to any nearby metallic or non-metallic object. If the discharge is to orthrough an electronic device, such as the nurse call system, the operation of the device maybe affected. If the discharge current passes through internal components, these componentsmay be damaged or their operation degraded.

What Can We Do About It? The manufacturer of the nurse call equipment has already takensteps to protect the equipment from electrostatic discharge (ESD) effects. However, sincethe cause is not in the equipment, but in the environment, further measures are required ofthe installer and the user to achieve complete protection.

What The Installer Can Do: In humid climates or in places where the relative humidity iskept at 65% or greater, there will likely be few problems with ESD. Where problems mayoccur the following measures can be taken.

• Ground all exposed metal surfaces. Grounding should be to a #16 gauge or largerconductor.

• Install nurse call system wiring in metal conduit. This conduit may be used to groundpanels.

• Use shielded cable for nurse call system station-to-station wiring. The use of openconductors invites inductive coupling of discharge currents, which can cause the sameproblems as direct discharge currents.

• Ground your body before handling system components. This can be done by using awrist strap, or simply by contacting a grounded metal surface. Use caution to avoidhazardous voltages while grounded.

What The User Can Do: The most common generation of ESD in hospitals is due to chang-ing linen on hospital beds while the patient call cord or pillow speaker is still connected tothe nurse call system. The following precautions will help.

• Remove the call cord or pillow speaker from the bed before changing the linen. It willbe necessary for the nursing staff to discharge themselves by contacting a groundedmetal object before placing the call cord or pillow speaker back on the bed; otherwisea spark will jump to the nurse call equipment, causing the very damage they are tryingto avoid. To avoid a shock while discharging static electricity on the body, hold a metalobject, such as a key, and use that object to contact the grounded surface.

• Ground the bed and use antistatic mattress covers in contact with the bed frame. Forsafety, it may be desirable to make the ground connection through a 1-megohm resistor.Nursing staff must be trained to disconnect and reconnect the ground whenever bedshave to be moved.

• Use grounded appliances and equipment near nurse call systems. The use of approvedelectrical equipment will usually take care of this.

This information is provided to make you aware of ESD problems so that precautionsmay be taken to avoid damage and disruption of system operation.

A Word about ESD(Electrostatic Discharge)

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 12: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

xii • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 13: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 1Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This section provides complete operating instructions for all Tek-CARE® NC300™II Sys-tem Equipment, as well as drawing references for use in locating and describing all controlsand indicators. System operators must read the following operating instructions concerningsystem equipment and terms used in conjunction with the equipment.

Fault Light

Hookswitch

Handset

Volume Control

Speaker

LCD Display

Call Light

Function Buttons

Numeric Keypad

Microphone

Tray

Figure 1 – NC304LCD Master StationNC304 controls are the same, but device has no LCD display

Function Buttons: These buttons control most system functions and are described below.

TALK (White) Controls loudspeaker audio—press to talk and release to listen.

ALPHA (White) Switches to alternate key usage for alpha characters.

RESET (Black) Terminates most operations, and typically allows the user to exitprogramming without saving.

STAT (Red) Initiates an urgent “STAT” service request.

FOLLOW (Orange) Initiates Nurse Follower operations. The button’s LED will lightwhile function is in use.

AIDE (Yellow) Initiates Aide service request.

NURSE (Green) Initiates Nurse service request.

MONITOR (Blue) Displays Monitor function menu for entering room numbers andinitiating the Monitor function.

CAPTURE (Blue) Displays menu for the master’s Zone assignments (for themaster on which the button is pressed).

PRIVACY (Blue) Changes the Privacy status of the patient station number entered.

VIEW (Blue) Displays the Station Information box. Enter a room number andbed ID to review the specific information about that station.

PRIORITY (Blue) Changes the priority status of the patient station number entered.

MENU (Blue) Displays system menus and functions.

PAGE (Med. Gray) Initiates Paging functions.

TONE ON (Lt. Gray) Silences the tone for Routine calls. LED indicates status.

Numeric Keypad: The keypad is used for entry of information, programming and configu-ration.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC304 Master StationControls and Indicators

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 14: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

2 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Handset: The handset is used to provide private conversation when loudspeaker communi-cation is not desired. To use, simply pick up the handset. Users may also return to masterstation console mode from keyboard mode by simply picking up the handset and placing itback down (actuating the hookswitch). This is particularly useful if the master station hasbeen left in keyboard operation mode and the keyboard has been removed.

Call Light: The call light flashes slowly for low priority calls, at a medium rate for mediumpriority calls, and at a fast rate for high priority calls.

Fault Light: This indicator light flashes in alternation with the call light when a centralequipment fault occurs.

LCD Display (NC304LCD): This display shows up to 4 calls, sorted by priority and timeof origin.

Volume Control: This control adjusts the incoming voice communication level.

Speaker/Microphone: These components are used for communicating with the patientand staff stations.

Tone Signals:Fast repeating tone—High Priority call; Master, Central or Polling Processor Fail fault(cannot be silenced or reset at master)

Slow repeating tone—Medium Priority call

Single tone every 8 seconds—Low Priority call; Lamp, Code or Comm fault (can besilenced, but cannot be reset at master)

Tray: The tray holds a Quick-Reference Card for system operations.

Figure 2 – NC304 Master Station(rear view of cabinet)

NC304 Master StationConnections

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 15: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 3Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

LAN Port: Currently unused. Provided for future applications.

VGA Port: The NC315 LCD/NC313 VGA monitor is plugged into this port. Note: If noVGA monitor is connected to the master station, the VGA port will shut down. To reactivateit, connect a VGA monitor to the master station and reset it using the Reset button.

Serial Port: This port provides a connection point for UL® 1069 Listed serial devices, or toconnect a laptop computer for software upgrades.

CE Port: This port is the connection point for the provided cable that interconnects themaster station to the provided wall plate jack. The wall plate is connected to the centralequipment via field wiring, as described later in this manual.

Power Connector: This connector is where the included PK304 Power Supply is con-nected to the master station.

PS/2 Keyboard Port: This port is used to connect a PC-type keyboard for entering systemdata and settings as an alternate to using the master station. See Keyboard Functions laterin Part 1.

Parallel Port: This port provides a connection point for UL® 1069 Listed parallel devices.

Reset Switch (not shown in diagram): On the underside of the master station is an accesshole with a visible microswitch inside. Momentarily pressing this microswitch will reset(soft boot) the master station.

Figure 2a – NC306 Master Station

Function buttons: Most function buttons perform different tasks depending whether aselector button is pushed first. (Refer to Figure 46, Keypad for NC306.)

Only the function button is pushed:

TALK (Gray) Controls loudspeaker audio—press to talk and release to listen.

PRIVACY (Red) Shows which stations have privacy set.

FOLLOW (Orange) Initiates Nurse Follower operations.

PRIORITY (Yellow) Shows which stations have personal attention or priority set.Stations’ selector key LEDs will flash slow or fast.

STAFF (Green) Shows locations of registered staff.

ZONE (Blue) Shows master settings for zones: Keys in the second row indicatezones A–J. Keys in the third row indicate zones K–P.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC304 Master StationConnectionscontinued

NC306 Master StationControls and Indicators

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 16: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

4 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ZONE, 0 Key-Press Tones on/off: when lit, key-press assurance tones areon—press button to toggle.

ZONE, 1 Preannounce on/off: when lit, a one second preannounce tone issent to a patient stations when selected—press button to toggle.

ZONE, 2 Guidance LEDs on/off: when lit, Function key LEDs light to showavailable options—press button to toggle.

ZONE, 3 No central radio paging.

ZONE, 4 Central paging enabled, call resets not sent to pagers.

ZONE, 5 Central paging enabled, call resets sent to pagers.

PAGE (Violet) Press to show pageable zones, then select a zone to page it.

RESET (Black) Terminates current function.

Selector button is pushed and then the function button is pushed:

TALK (Gray) Controls loudspeaker audio—press to talk and release to listen.

PRIVACY (Red) First press shows current privacy status of selected station,. Secondpress toggles on/off.

FOLLOW (Orange) Initiates Nurse Follow to the selected room.

PRIORITY (Yellow) First press shows current priority. Each additional press togglesthrough the priorities (routine, personal attention, priority).

STAFF (Green) Sets staff request for the selected room.

ZONE (Blue) Shows the zones the station is set for. Press the zone switches tochange the zones to which the station is assigned. Also showsthe station’s privacy, priority and zone paging on/off settings.

PAGE (Violet) Has no function.

RESET (Black) Terminates current function.

Reset LED: Flashes to indicate that RESET button must be pushed to complete an opera-tion.

Handset: The handset is used to provide private conversation when loudspeaker communi-cation is not desired. To use, simply pick up the handset.

Call Light: The call light flashes slowly for low priority calls, at a medium rate for mediumpriority calls, and at a fast rate for high priority calls.

Fault Light: This indicator lights when a fault occurs on the system.

Volume Control: This control adjusts the incoming voice communication level.

Speaker/Microphone: These components are used for communicating with the patientand staff stations.

Tone Signals:Fast repeating tone—High Priority call; Master, Central or Polling Processor Fail fault(cannot be silenced or reset at master)

Slow repeating tone—Medium Priority call

Single tone every 8 seconds—Low Priority call; Lamp, Code or Comm fault (can besilenced, but cannot be reset at master)

Tray: The tray holds a Quick-Reference Card for system operations.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC306 Master StationControls and Indicatorscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 17: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 5Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

Figure 2b – NC306 Master Station(rear view of cabinet)

Master Expander Port: This is the connection port for an NC255 Master Station Expander,to increase number of stations from 50 to 100. A maximum of three NC306 Masters withNC255 Expanders can be connected to the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 CentralEquipment. (Without NC255 Expanders, the maximum is four NC306 Masters.)

Dipswitches: Refer to the NC306 Dipswitch Settings figure in the Equipment Configura-tion and Settings section of System Installation.

Serial Port: This port provides a connection point for UL® 1069 Listed serial devices, or toconnect a laptop computer for software upgrades.

CE Port: This port is the connection point for the provided cable that interconnects themaster station to the provided wall plate jack. The wall plate is connected to the centralequipment via field wiring, as described later in this manual.

NC306 Master StationConnections

NC313 VGA MonitorControls and Indicators

Figure 3 – NC313 VGA Monitor

** ROOM LABEL CALL TIME NURSE AIDE STAT

0100-1 TESTCALL ROUTINE 12:00

TONE OFF 12:00 PM

Label Column

Room Column

Primary Master Indicator

Call Column

Tone-Off Indication

Pincushion/Trapezoid LED

Vert. Position/Vert. Size LED

Horz. Position/Horz. Size LED

Contrast/Brightness LED

Select

Nurse Column

Aide Column

Stat Column

Time Column

Time

Power Switch

Power Indicator

+ Adjustment

- Adjustment

MAIN MENU1 VIEW SYSTEM SETTINGS2 RECONFIGURATION3 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

Menu Box

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 18: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

6 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Power Switch: Press this switch to turn the monitor on, press again to turn the monitor off.

Power Indicator: When lit green, the monitor is powered on. See Troubleshooting Guideif the indicator is amber.

+ Adjustment: Press to increase the setting for the selected monitor adjustment parameter.This is used in conjunction with the Select button. If this is pressed in conjunction with the– Adjustment button, the monitor will be returned to default settings.

- Adjustment: Press to decrease the setting for the selected monitor adjustment parameter.This is used in conjunction with the Select button. If this is pressed in conjunction with the+ Adjustment, the monitor will be returned to default settings.

Select: Press to select the desired monitor adjustment parameter (indicated by the LED andcolor).

Contrast/Brightness LED: When lit green, the contrast parameter is selected. When litamber, the brightness parameter is selected.

Horizontal Position/Horizontal Size LED: When lit green, the horizontal-position pa-rameter is selected. When lit amber, the horizontal-size parameter is selected.

Vertical Position/Vertical Size LED: When lit green, the vertical-position parameter isselected. When lit amber, the vertical-size parameter is selected.

Pincushion/Trapezoid LED: When lit green, the pincushion parameter is selected. Whenlit amber, the trapezoid parameter is selected.

Primary Master Indicator: A double asterisk (**) indicates that the associated masterstation is the primary master station on the system, also known as master address #1. Asingle asterisk (*) indicates that the associated master station is not the primary masterstation.

Room Column: Room numbers for calls are displayed in this column.

Label Column: Labels assigned to rooms are displayed in this column when a call is placed.

Call Column: The type of call placed is displayed here.

Time Column: The time the call was placed is displayed here.

Nurse Column: Nurse presence registry and nurse requests are displayed in this column.

Aide Column: Aide presence registry and aide requests are displayed in this column.

Stat Column: Stat requests are displayed in this column.

Menu Box: These will appear when the menu button is pressed. See the System Configu-ration and Programming section for additional information.

Tone-Off Indication: When “Tone Off” is displayed, routine call tones are silenced. When“Tone On” is displayed, routine call tones will annunciate.

Time: The time the last system activity occurred is displayed here.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC313 VGA MonitorControls and Indicatorscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 19: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 7Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Call Types and Priority Indications: Incoming calls are displayed in Standard English. Theyare displayed in order of origination and priority (see Priority Listing below). Up to 22 callevents may be displayed at the same time. Additional calls are stored in memory and areindicated by a “MORE CALLS WAITING” message. A ROUTINE call will be upgraded toPERSONAL ATTENTION once the overtime limit is exceeded. If a Nurse or Aide request isallowed to exceed the overtime limit, a call will automatically be generated for the associatedroom.

Priority ListingHigh Priority CODE CALL

FIRE *MONITOR

Medium Priority EMERGENCYBATHPRIORITYBED OUTCORD OUT

Low Priority PERSONAL ATTENTIONDUTYSTAFFROUTINE

* NOTE: The Tek-CARE® NC300™II System is not tested as a fire alarm system and isnot intended as a primary means of evacuation.

System Status Indications: These indications occur to let the system users know when theTek-CARE® NC300™II System has detected faults. These can only be canceled by correct-ing the source of the fault. Reference the Troubleshooting Guide for suggestions to re-solve these problems.

COMM. FAULT – Indicates that the system is no longer communicating with the indicatedstation.

LAMP FAULT – Indicates that the supervised dome or zone lamp associated with the pa-tient station has an open lamp bulb. If this indication appears with unsupervised domelamps, verify that the lamp fault jumper is installed (refer to Figure 31—IR3xx-series SeriesConnections to Peripheral Devices).

MASTER FAILURE(S) # – This indication appears on other master stations when a masterstation is no longer communicating with the central equipment. The # symbol representsthe master number and master port that is experiencing a problem (1 through 8). When thisevent occurs, all calls on the system are displayed on all of the remaining master stations.All zone controls are overridden. To restore the system to its previous operational state,correct the master failure, and then power down the entire system and restart it.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR FAIL – This indicates that the master station is no longer com-municating with the central equipment or that one of the processors in the central equip-ment has failed. This message may be displayed during normal start-up and reboot pro-cesses as the system begins to come online.

POLLING PROCESSOR FAIL – This indicates that one of the processors in the centralequipment has failed.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC313 VGA MonitorControls and Indicatorscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 20: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

8 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Miscellaneous Indications:BED OUT – This is a call type that is initiated when the system incorporates RY351B Hill-Rom® Adapter Modules. It indicates that a bed has been disconnected from the associatedwall plate.

NURSE FOLLOW ACTIVE – Indicates that the nurse follower feature is active.

TONE-OFF – Indicates that the routine call tones have been silenced.

TIME – Indicates the time of the last system activity.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC315 LCD VGA MonitorControls and Indicators

** ROOM LABEL CALL TIME NURSE AIDE STAT

1701-D TESTCALL ROUTINE 12:00

TONE OFF 12:00 PM

Label Column

Room Column

Primary Master Indicator

Call Column

Tone-Off Indication

Select

Nurse Column

Aide Column

Stat Column

Time Column

Time

Power Switch

+ Adjustment

- Adjustment

MAIN MENU1 VIEW SYSTEM SETTINGS2 RECONFIGURATION3 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

Menu Box

Function

Power Indicator

Figure 3a – NC315 LCD VGA Monitor

The NC315 LCD VGA Monitor functions in the same manner as the NC313 VGA Monitor,except that the NC315 does not include the following indicators:

• Contrast/Brightness LED• Horizontal Position/Horizontal Size LED• Vertical Position/Vertical Size LED• Pincushion/Trapezoid LED

NC313 VGA MonitorControls and Indicatorscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 21: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 9Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Call information will be displayed on the LCD or VGA monitor and will be accompanied by anaudible tone. Low, Medium and High priority calls will generate specific call information andtone rates as described in the preceding controls and indicators information. Calls are sortedby priority and time of origination. Calls made to the master station may be answered in oneof the following two methods.

Answer a Call Automatically: (Answers the oldest, highest priority call.)• Press the “TALK” (white) button or pick up the handset. The call tone will be

silenced, and communication to the room will be established. If the pre-announcecall tone is active, a one-second tone will be heard at the master and patient sta-tions when the “TALK” button is first pressed, or when the handset is picked up.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset, speakand listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished. Mediumpriority, high priority and personal attention calls must be reset at point of origin.

Answer a Call Selectively:• Enter the room number and bed number for the desired call and press the “TALK”

(white) button or pick up the handset. The call tone will be silenced and communi-cation to the room will be established. If the pre-announce call tone is active, a onesecond tone will be heard at the master and patient stations when the “TALK”button is pressed or when the handset is picked up.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset, speakand listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished. Mediumpriority, high priority and personal attention calls must be reset at point of origin.

Once a call has been answered, the user can place it on hold by pressing the “PAGE” (gray)key. On hold status will be indicated by the room number being displayed on the top of thescreen in yellow. If the handset is in use, it must be hung up. This allows the user to closethe audio connection to the room they were speaking to, but not cancel the call. Once done,the user can handle another call, hang up the handset, and then return to the previous call bypressing “PAGE” and then pressing “TALK” or picking up the handset. If the call is manu-ally selected and reset, the page indicator at the top of the screen will remain and can becleared by pressing “PAGE” and then “RESET.”

Before connecting to a room (before audio is engaged), a user can press the “PRIVACY”(blue) key or the “PRIORITY” (blue) key to change the settings for that room. Privacytoggles on and off, and Priority cycles through Routine, Personal Attention and Priority.Status changes are indicated on the screen.

If a medium or high priority call is placed while a master station is in communication withanother station, the communication path will be closed and the call placed on hold within 8-10 seconds. This prevents an audio path from being accidentally left open, and ensures thatmedium and high priority calls are annunciated.

Place a Call:• Enter the room number and bed number on the keypad and press the “TALK”

(white) button or pick up the handset. Communication to the room will be estab-lished. If the pre-announce call tone is enabled, a one-second tone will be heardwhen the “TALK” button is pressed or when the handset is picked up. If the stationis already in communication with another master, a “PORT BUSY” message willappear.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset thenspeak and listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished.

NC304, NC304LCDMaster Operation

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 22: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

10 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This function can be activated if other calls are waiting, but will be overridden by higherpriority calls. If the patient station being called is in privacy mode, the master station willnot be able to listen to the room station.

Place a Call to Another Master Station:• Enter the master station number (1 – 8) on the keypad and pick up the handset. If

the master station is already in communication, a “PORT BUSY” message willappear. The user must enter only the single digit master number, with no precedingor following zeros.

• Wait for the other master station to respond, and then speak and listen as desired.• Hang up the handset when finished.

The push to talk feature may be used in lieu of the handset if desired. Instead of picking upthe handset, push the “TALK” (white) button to initiate the call to the other master station.Once the call is connected, press “TALK” to speak and release to listen.

Receive a Call from Another Master Station:• A message box will appear on the screen indicating which master is calling.• Pick up the handset and then speak and listen as desired.• Hang up the handset when finished.

The push to talk feature may be used in lieu of the handset if desired. Instead of picking upthe handset, push the “TALK” (white) button to communicate to the other master station.Press “TALK” to speak and release to listen.

Request or Cancel Nurse/Aide Service:• Enter the desired room number and press the “NURSE” (green) or “AIDE” (yel-

low) button.• The room number will begin to flash under the appropriate Nurse or Aide column,

or if canceling, the number will be removed from the Nurse or Aide column.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Nurse or Aide requests may also be made while communicating with a room station bypressing the “NURSE” or “AIDE” buttons. Once a request is made, the room location willindicate a service call until it has been answered. If the overtime feature has been set, Nurseand Aide requests will trigger call placement to the master station when they exceed theovertime limit. See SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station Operation for details on re-sponding to service requests. If an SF350B is not in use on the system, staff members cancancel service requests by pressing the “RESET” (red) button on the associated patientstation.

Request or Cancel Stat Service:• Enter the desired room number and pick up the handset to connect audio to the

room.• Press the “STAT” (red) button.• Hang up handset.

Repeat the above procedure to cancel Stat service. This function requires that an audioconnection be established, preventing casual activation or deactivation.

Page a Zone:• Press the “PAGE” (gray) button and enter the desired zone letter (A – P). Since all

zones are letters, the master station will automatically activate the “ALPHA” (white)key, enabling the alternate alpha characters printed on the master’s buttons. If aport or a station within the specified zone is already in use by another masterstation, a “PORT BUSY” message will appear.

NC304, NC304LCDMaster Operationcontinued

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 23: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 11Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

• Press the “TALK” (white) button to speak, or pick up the handset and speak.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

The ability to listen is disabled when this function is engaged.

Page All Assigned Zones:• Press the “PAGE” (gray) button twice. If a port or a station within the specified

zones is already in use by another master station, a “PORT BUSY” message willappear.

• Press the “TALK” (white) button to speak, or pick up the handset and speak asdesired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

The ability to listen is disabled when this function is engaged.

Page Nurse/Aide by Presence Registration:• Press the “PAGE” (gray) button and then press the “ALPHA” (white) button.• Press the “NURSE” (green) or “AIDE” (yellow) button and then press the # key. If

a port or a station within the specified presence area is already in use by anothermaster station, a “PORT BUSY” message will appear.

• Press the “TALK” (white) button to speak, or pick up the handset and speak asdesired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

The ability to listen is disabled when this function is engaged.

Page All Stations on the System:• Press the “PAGE” (gray) button and then the “RESET” (black) button (Note: the

reset button is actually being used as the “X” alpha key in this application). If aport or a station on the system is already in use by another master station, a “PORTBUSY” message will appear.

• Press the “TALK” (white) button to speak, or pick up the handset and speak asdesired.

• Press the “RESET” button when finished.

The ability to listen is disabled when this function is engaged.

Use Room Monitoring:Room monitoring provides the staff with the ability to monitor (listen to) up to 8 patientstations simultaneously.

• Press the “MONITOR” (blue) button. The room monitoring box will be displayed.• Enter the room and bed number for the first station to be monitored, and then press

the # key.• Repeat until all stations to be monitored are entered.• Press the # key to activate room monitoring.• Press any button when finished. The entered room numbers will be retained in

memory and can be quickly accessed again by pressing the “MONITOR” buttonagain. To clear the entered room numbers, access the Monitor function via themenu as described in the System Configuration and Programming section un-der the System Functions menu. It is also possible to clear any individual roomfrom the group by pressing the “MONITOR” button and reentering the numberfor the device that is already on the list.

NC304, NC304LCDMaster Operationcontinued

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 24: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

12 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Use Nurse/Aide Follower:This feature allows the staff to receive call tone annunciation while in a patient’s room.

Method 1 – Does not require SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Stations• Make sure no calls are pending before engaging the follower function.• To send the call annunciation to a specific room, enter the room number and press

the “FOLLOW” (orange) button.• The light on the “FOLLOW” button will illuminate, indicating that the function is

active. If a VGA monitor is connected to the master, a message box will appearand display the programmed room number.

• Proceed to the room. If a call is placed within the master’s zone assignments, the“RESET” (red) light on the follower programmed patient station will illuminateand a tone will sound. This is to inform the staff member that a call is activeelsewhere. This call indication can be silenced by pressing the reset button on thepatient’s station.

• Return to the master station when ready and press the “FOLLOW” button to dis-engage the feature.

Method 2 – Requires SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Stations• Make sure no calls are pending before engaging the follower function.• To enable a following call annunciation, press the “FOLLOW” (orange) button.• The light on the “FOLLOW” button will illuminate indicating that the function is

active. If a VGA monitor is connected to the master, a message box will appearand indicate that the function is active.

• Proceed to a room and press the registration button for Nurse (green) or Aide(yellow). If a call is placed within the master’s zone assignments, the “RESET”(red) light on the associated patient station will illuminate and a tone will sound.This is to inform the staff member that a call is active elsewhere. This call indica-tion can be silenced by pressing the reset button on the patient’s station.

• To change rooms, press the appropriate registration button again. Go to the nextdesired room and press the appropriate registration button. Press it again whenleaving the room.

• Return to the master station when ready and press the “FOLLOW” button to dis-engage the feature.

If master stations share zones, only one master station may use the follower feature at atime.

Taking the Master Station Offline:Method 1 – Turning it off.

• Unplug the power connector.• Master fault indications and tones will occur on the other master stations.

Method 2 – Using the keyboard (reference NC304 Master Station Connections).• Connect the keyboard cable to the PS/2 connection on the back of the NC304.• Activate the keyboard by pressing “MENU” and then “6.” NOTE: If the key-

board is already active, this step is unnecessary.• Press the F11 key, enter a valid username and password (refer to the Set User

Name/Password function in the Reconfiguration menu under System Configura-tion and Programming section), and press “3” (selects Exit to DOS function). Ifan event printer is connected to the central equipment, “MASTER <master #>OFFLINE” will be printed. No fault signals will be generated and the master sta-tion will retain its address information.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC304, NC304LCDMaster Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 25: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 13Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Method 3 – Setting the Master Address to 0• Set the master station address to 0 (refer to System Operation, Configuration

and Programming, Set Master ID function) and then unplug the device.• If an event printer is connected to the central equipment, “MASTER <master #>

OFFLINE” will be printed. No fault signals will be generated.• If master power is cycled, the master will request entry of an ID after it com-

pletes the boot process.

Bringing the Master Station Online:• Connect power to the NC304 power connector and wait for the master station to

boot.• The message “IDENTIFYING OTHER MASTER STATIONS, PLEASE WAIT”

will be displayed in red, along with the master station information box. This mes-sage will clear within 2 minutes. Speed up the process by pressing the MasterSeek button on the central equipment (refer to Figure 40—NC351(A)/2 InternalHardware Diagram).

• The message “READY TO ASSIGN MASTER ID. CONTINUE” will be dis-played in white. Assign the master ID (refer to the System Operation, Configu-ration and Programming section, specifically Set Master ID function). NOTE:If the master station already has an ID programmed into it from a previous opera-tion, it will automatically come up with that ID. This ID can be changed by usingthe Set Master ID function.

• The master station should come online (top line of text on monitor will changefrom gray to white) with no fault indications within 2 minutes. The Master Seekbutton can be pressed to shorten this time. If an event printer is connected to thesystem, the message “MASTER <master #> ONLINE” will be printed.

• Perform the Restore Local Database function (refer to System Operation, Con-figuration and Programming section).

• If this is the first time the master is powered up, the Detect System Stationsfunction in the System Functions menu must be performed.

Radio Paging Operation:The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call System provides support to interface with RF pocketpaging applications via the serial ports. When properly configured, the radio paging func-tions are transparent to the user and happen automatically, with the exception of custompages that are entered manually by the user. The details of setting this up are covered in theSystem Configuration and Programming section.

Event Printing:The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call System provides support to interface with a serialprinter for event printing. When properly configured, the event printing functions are trans-parent to the user and will happen automatically. The details of setting this up are coveredin the System Configuration and Programming section. An event printing sample isprovided at the end of this manual. Refer to the Table of Contents for the specific location.

View Station Information: Press the “View” (blue) key.

The NC306 Direct Select Master Station has the same general functions as the NC304 andNC304LED master stations. Incoming calls are displayed on the master’s selector keys,accompanied by an audible tone. (Refer to Figure 46—Keypad for NC306.) Low, mediumand high priority calls generate differing call tones and flash rates. Calls are answeredusing one of these two methods:

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC304, NC304LCDMaster Operationcontinued

NC306 Master Operation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 26: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

14 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer a Call Automatically: (Answers the oldest, highest priority call.)• Press the “TALK” (gray) button or pick up the handset. The call tone will be

silenced, and communication to the room will be established. If the pre-announcecall tone is active, a one-second tone will be heard at the master and patient sta-tions when the “TALK” button is first pressed, or when the handset is picked up.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset, speakand listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished. Mediumpriority, high priority and personal attention calls must be reset at point of origin.

Answer a Call Selectively:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and press the “TALK” (gray)

button or pick up the handset. The call tone will be silenced and communication tothe room will be established. If the pre-announce call tone is active, a one secondtone will be heard at the master and patient stations when the “TALK” button ispressed or when the handset is picked up.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset, speakand listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished. Mediumpriority, high priority and personal attention calls must be reset at point of origin.

After connecting to a room, a user can press the “PRIVACY” (red) button or the“PRIORITY” (yellow) button to change the settings for that room. Privacy toggles on andoff, and Priority cycles through Routine, Personal Attention and Priority. Status changes areindicated by the selector LED:

Privacy PriorityOn: Flashing Routine: SteadyOff: Steady Pers. Attn.: Slowly Flashing

Priority: Fast Flashing

Place a Call:• Press the selector button for the desired room and pick up the handset or push the

“TALK” (gray) button. If the pre-announce tone is enabled, a one-second tone willbe heard when the “TALK” button is pressed or when the handset is picked up. Ifthe station is already in communication with another master, the “TALK LED” willflash on the master to indicate that the port is busy.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset thenspeak and listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished.

This function can be activated if other calls are waiting, but will be overridden by higherpriority calls. If the patient station being called is in privacy mode, then the master stationwill not be able to listen to the room station.

Place a Call to Another Master Station:• Press the “PAGE” (violet) button on the master. LEDs in the first row of selector

keys will light to show which masters are connected to the system. Press theselector key for the desired master.

• Press “TALK” when speaking and release to listen, or if using the handset thenspeak and listen as desired.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button or hang up the handset when finished.

Receive a Call from Another Master Station – See the Answer a Call Automaticallysection above.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC306 Master Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 27: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 15Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Request or Cancel Staff Service:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “STAFF” (green)

button.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

A Staff request may also be made while communicating with a room by pressing the “STAFF”(green) button. Once a request is made, the room location will indicate a service call until ithas been answered. If the overtime feature has been set (requires NC304 series masterstation), Staff requests will trigger call placement to the master station when they exceed theovertime limit. See SF250 Staff Presence Station Operation or SF350B Nurse/Aide Pres-ence Station Operation for details on responding to Staff requests. If an SF250 or SF350B isnot in use on the system, staff members can cancel service requests by pressing the “RESET”button on the associated patient station.

Display Staff Presence and Service Requests:• Press the “STAFF” (green) button.• Rooms with Staff Presence are indicated by slow flashing selector LEDs.

Rooms with Service Request set are indicated by rapid flashing selector LEDs.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Request or Cancel Stat Service:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “STAFF” (green)

button twice rapidly. Or, while communicating with a room, press the “STAFF”(green) button twice rapidly.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Page a Zone:• Press the “PAGE” (violet) button. LEDs in the second and third rows of selector

keys will light to show which zones (A–P) are available on the system. Press theselector key for the desired zone. If the selected zone is already in use by anothermaster station, the “TALK LED” will flash on the master to indicate that the zone isbusy.

• Press the “TALK” (gray) button to talk, or if using the handset then speak asdesired. When this function is engaged, listening is disabled.

• Press “RESET” (black) or hang up the handset when finished.

Page All Assigned Zones; Page All Zones:• Press “PAGE” (violet) and then “ZONE” (blue) to page all zones assigned to that

master station. Press “PAGE” twice to page all zones on the system.• Press the “TALK” (gray) button to talk, or if using the handset then speak as

desired. When this function is engaged, listening is disabled.• Press “RESET” (black) or hang up the handset when finished.

Page Staff by Presence Registration:• Press the “PAGE” (violet) button and then press the “STAFF” (green) button.• Press the “TALK” (gray) button to talk, or if using the handset then speak as

desired. When this function is engaged, listening is disabled.• Press “RESET” (black) or hang up the handset when finished.

Use Staff Follower – This feature allows the staff to receive call tone annunciation while ina patient’s room.

Method 1 – Does not require SF250 or SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Stations• Make sure no calls are pending before engaging the follower function.• To send the call annunciation to a specific room, press the selector button for the

specific room and push the “FOLLOW” (orange) button.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC306 Master Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 28: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

16 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

• The light on the “FOLLOW” button will blink to show the function is active.• Proceed to the room. If a call is placed within the master’s zone assignments, the

“RESET” (red) light on the follower programmed patient station will illuminate anda tone will sound. This is to inform the staff member that a call is active elsewhere.This call indication can be silenced by pressing the reset button on the patient’sstation.

• Return to the master station when ready and press the “RESET” (black) button todisengage the feature.

Method 2 – Requires SF250 or SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Stations• Make sure no calls are pending before engaging the follower function.• To enable a following call annunciation, press the “FOLLOW” (orange) button.• The light on the “FOLLOW” button will illuminate indicating that the function is

active.• Proceed to a room and press the registration button for Nurse (green) or Aide

(yellow). If a call is placed within the master’s zone assignments, the “RESET” (red)light on the associated patient station will illuminate and a tone will sound. This isto inform the staff member that a call is active elsewhere. This call indication can besilenced by pressing the reset button on the patient’s station.

• To change rooms, press the appropriate registration button again. Go to the nextdesired room and press the appropriate registration button. Press it again whenleaving the room.

• Return to the master station when ready and press the “RESET” (black) button todisengage the feature.

If master stations share zones, only one master station can use the follower feature at a time.

Taking the Master Station Offline:Method 1 – Disconnect the communciation cable from the rear of the master station. Masterfault indications and tones will occur on the other master stations. Cycling power to the CEwill clear the fault.

Method 2 – Using Master Station Button Presses:• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the

“RESET” (black) button is lit.• Press the “FOLLOW” (orange) button. No fault signals will be generated and the

master station will retain its address information.

Bringing the Master Station Online:Method 1 – Disconnect the communication cable from the rear of the master, wait a fewseconds, and then reconnect it. The master will be back online within one minute.

Method 2 – Switch off the power to the central equipment, and then power it up again.

Radio Paging Operation:The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call System provides support to interface with RF pocketpaging applications via the serial ports. When properly configured, the radio paging func-tions are transparent to the user and will happen automatically. The details of setting this upare covered in the System Configuration and Programming section.

Event Printing:The Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call System provides support to interface with a serialprinter for event printing. When properly configured, the event printing functions are trans-parent to the user and will happen automatically. The details of setting this up are covered inthe System Configuration and Programming section. An event printing sample is pro-vided at the end of this manual. Refer to the Table of Contents for the specific location.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

NC306 Master Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 29: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 17Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Refer to Figures 4–8a for the locations, names and functions of the controls and indicators ofthese devices. A brief description of the operating controls for patient stations follows.

Call-Placed Light: The call-placed light flashes when any call is placed from the patientstation.

Reset Switch/In-Use Light: The reset button cancels a call placed from the station. Thelight illuminates whenever communications from the master station is engaged.

Call Cord Receptacle: There are three kinds of call cord receptacles. The 0.25" roundreceptacle, found on the IR301-series, IR302-series and SF380-series, uses SF301 and SF302type call cords. The 8P8C rectangular receptacle, found on the IR311-series andIR312-series, uses SF301 pillow speakers, SF301DIG pillow speakers, SF311 call cords orSF312 call cords. The round DIN receptacle, found on the IR319-series and IR320-series,uses SF401 call cords, SF401P pillow speakers, SF401DIG pillow speakers or SF41-seriespillow speakers.

Pull Cord: The IR318-series provides an integral call-initiating pull cord. Patients simply pullon the cord to trigger a call.

Speaker/Microphone: The speaker/microphone is used for voice communications and tonesignaling. Due to the high sensitivity of the speaker/microphone, the patient does not needto move close to the device, or to speak above normal levels to be heard.

Figure 4 – IR301-series Single Patient Station

Figure 5 – IR302-series Dual Patient Station

Figure 6 – IR311-series Single Patient Station

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

IR301-series, IR302-series,IR311-series, IR312-series,IR318-series, IR319-series,IR320-series, SF380-seriesPatient Station Operation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 30: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

18 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Figure 7 – IR312-series Dual Patient Station

Figure 8 – IR318-series Single Patient Station

Figure 8a – SF380-series Single Patient Station

Figure 8b – IR319-series Single Patient Station

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

IR301-series, IR302-series,IR311-series, IR312-series,IR318-series, IR319-series,IR320-series, SF380-seriesPatient Station Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 31: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 19Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

Figure 8c – IR320-series Dual Patient Station

To Place a Call:• Press the call button on the end of the call cord, or press the red call button with the

nurse or cross symbol on the pillow speaker, or pull on the IR318-series call cord. (SeeFigure 8.)

• Call placement can be verified by the flashing of the Call-Placed Light. A “Cord-Out”call will automatically be placed if a call cord or pillow speaker is removed from the IR301-series, IR302-series, IR311-series, IR312-series, IR319-series, IR320-series or SF380-series. Note: SF380-series stations must be programmed for Personal Attn. PriorityLevel.

To Respond to a Call:• Reply in a normal voice when spoken to. The audio communication will normally

come from the patient station. If IR311-series, IR319-series, IR312-series orIR320-series devices are used with PM311C or PM312C Pillow Speaker Modules andSF301PI, SF301DIG, SF401DIG or SF41-series, audio communications will be from thepillow speaker. Calls placed from SF380-series stations must be handled in person,because the SF380-series do not incorporate audio communication.

To Cancel a Call:• Press the reset button until the call-placed LED is extinguished.• Canceling a call placed by the removal of a call cord can be accomplished by

replacing the call cord.

Television Controls:• For IR311-series and IR312-series patient stations with SF301P, or IR319-series and

IR320-series patient stations with SF401P, press the button labeled “TV” or with

the television symbol . If the television is off, the first press will turn it on.Each successive press will step through the channels until the television turnsback off. The volume may be adjusted by rotating the volume control until thedesired level is reached. This control only adjusts television audio levels. NOTE:Connect only UL® 1410 approved hospital-grade TVs in this application.

Television, Radio and Lighting Controls:• For IR311-series and IR312-series patient stations with SF301DIG, or IR319-series

and IR320-series patient stations with SF401DIG or SF41-series, press the buttonlabeled “TV” to turn the television on or off. Press the channel up/down buttons tochange the channel. Press the button labeled “CC” button to turn Closed Captioningon or off. Press the “ ” button to turn the radio on or off. Press the volume up/down buttons to adjust the volume. Press the room light and read light buttons toturn the room and read lights on and off (requires PM321B or PM322B Lamp Con-trol Module). NOTE: Connect only UL® 1410 approved hospital-grade TVs in thisapplication.

IR301-series, IR302-series,IR311-series, IR312-series,IR318-series, IR319-series,IR320-series, SF380-seriesPatient Station Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 32: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

20 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

IR301-series, IR302-series,IR311-series, IR312-series,IR318-series, IR319-series,IR320-series, SF380-seriesPatient Station Operationcontinued

Figure 9 – SF301 and SF302 Call Cords

Figure 10 – SF311 and SF312 Call Cords

Figure 10a – SF401 Call Cord

Figure 11 – SF301P/SF401P, SF301PI2L/SF401P2L, SF301DIG/SF401DIG,SF41ZDL and SF41ZKAL Pillow Speakers

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 33: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 21Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Call Button/Call-Placed Light: The call button is used to place a call to the master. The calllight will flash to indicate that a call has been placed. On the duty station, it also indicates callinformation from other stations sharing the same zones. See Priority Signals in this section.

Reset Switch/In-Use Light: The reset button is used to cancel a call placed from the station.The light illuminates whenever communication from the master station is engaged. On theduty station, it also serves as a tone-off button to silence low priority call tone annunciation.Once engaged, the tone will only reactivate after all low priority calls have been cleared.Medium and High priority calls will override this and cannot be silenced.

Emergency Light: This is provided only on the duty station and is used to indicate callinformation from other stations sharing the same zones.

Priority Signals: The duty station provides an additional annunciation device to the Tek-CARE® NC300™II System. It will annunciate call information from other stations that sharethe same zone(s) by doing the following:

Low Priority Calls – The call-placed light will flash and a tone will be emittedevery 8 seconds.

Medium Priority Calls – The emergency light and call-placed lights will flashalternately and a repeating tone will be emitted at a half-second rate.

High Priority Calls / Stat Service Request – The emergency light and call-placedlight will flash alternately at twice the rate of medium priority calls and a fastrepeating tone will be emitted at a quarter-second rate.

Speaker/Microphone: The speaker/microphone is used for voice communications and tonesignaling. Due to the high sensitivity of the speaker/microphone, it is not necessary to raisethe voice above normal speaking levels to be heard.

To Place a Call: Press the call button. The call-placed light will flash.

To Respond to a Call: Reply in a normal voice when spoken to.

To Cancel a Call: Press the reset button until the call-placed LED is extinguished.

To Silence a Low Priority Call Tone: Press the reset button. NOTE: If another call is placed,the tone signal will resume until either the reset button is pressed again or the pendingcalls have been resolved.

NOTE: The IR315-series Duty Station does not support locally connected code call devices.

Speaker/Microphone

Call Button/Call Placed Light

Reset Switch/In-use Light

Figure 12 – IR310-series Staff Station

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

IR310-series Staff andIR315-series Duty StationOperation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 34: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

22 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Speaker/Microphone

Call Button/Call Placed Light

Emergency Light

Reset Switch/In-use Light

Figure 13 – IR315-series Duty Station (code stations cannot be wired to duty stations)

Pull-Down/Reset Lever: The pull-down/reset lever is used to place and reset bath prioritycalls.

Call-Placed Light: The red light flashes to indicate call placement.

To Place a Call: Pull on the red lever, or pull down on the 7' attached cord (if installed).

To Cancel a Call: Push the red lever to the “up” position. Calls must be reset at the point oforigin.

Figure 14 – SF337C Water Resistant Pull/Pull Cord Bath Station

The SF340B and SF381 devices function in the same manner as the SF337C, but are notwater resistant.

Pull-Down/Reset Lever: The pull-down/reset lever is used to place and reset code prioritycalls.

Call-Placed Light: The red light flashes to indicate call placement.

To Place a Call: Pull on the blue lever.

To Cancel a Call: Push the blue lever to the “up” position. Calls must be reset at the pointof origin.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

SF337C Water ResistantPull/Pull CordBath Station Operation

SF340B and SF381 Pull/PullCord Bath Station Operation

IR310-series Staff andIR315-series Duty StationOperationcontinued

SF341B and SF382Code Call Station Operation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 35: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 23Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

CODE

Call Placed Light

Code Pull-Down/Reset Lever

Figure 15 – SF341B and SF382 Code Call Station

Nurse Registration Button: The nurse registration button (green) is used to initiate andcancel a nurse-present signal to the master station. Upon registration activation, it will alsoreset any routine, personal attention or priority call made from the associated room.

Aide Registration Button: The aide registration button (yellow) is used to initiate andcancel an aide-present signal to the master station. Upon registration activation, it will alsoreset any routine, personal attention or priority call made from the associated room.

Nurse Registration Light: The green light will flash to indicate a nurse service requestand will light steadily to indicate a nurse-present status. This light will go out when thenurse is no longer registered in the room.

Aide Registration Light: The yellow light will flash to indicate an aide service request andwill light steadily to indicate an aide-present status. This light will go out when the aide isno longer registered in the room.

To Register Nurse or Aide Presence: Press the green (nurse) or yellow (aide) button.

To Cancel Nurse or Aide Presence: Press the green (nurse) or yellow (aide) button.

NURSE

AIDE

Nurse RegistrationLight/ Button

Aide RegistrationLight/Button

Figure 16 – SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station

Staff Registration Button: The staff registration button (green) is used to initiate and can-cel a staff-present signal to the master station. Upon registration activation, it will also resetany routine, personal attention or priority call made from the associated room.

Staff Registration Light: The green LED will flash to indicate a staff service request andwill light steadily to indicate a staff-present status. This LED will go out when staff is nolonger registered in the room.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

SF341B and SF382Code Call Station Operationcontinued

SF350B Nurse/Aide PresenceStation Operation

SF250 Staff PresenceStation Operation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 36: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

24 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Figure 16a – SF250 Staff Presence Station

The LI series dome/zone lamps provide for local or zone indication of call origin, priority andstaff presence. Dome lamp applications are local to a specific room and annunciate callinformation for that room. Zone lamps are representative of a group (or zone) of stationsand will annunciate the highest priority call from that group. The LI380 and LI384A pro-vide the same functions, except that the LI384A provides bulb supervision (faults are indi-cated at the master station). These devices may serve for dome or zone operation (dependingon the station they are connected to). The LI386-series is a stand-alone device that is notused with other stations and is typically used for zone applications. It can, however, supporta limited number of devices for local annunciation. The LI386-series is addressed in the samemanner as patient and staff stations, and supports no voice communication functions.

Lamp Indications:

High Priority (fast repeating flash):Code Call Alternate flashing red and whiteFire Flashing red (supplementary signal only)Emergency Flashing whiteStat Service Request Alternate flashing green and yellow

Medium Priority (slow repeating flash):Monitor Flashing redBath Flashing whiteBed Out Flashing whiteCord Out Flashing whitePriority Flashing whiteNurse Service Request Flashing greenAide Service Request Flashing yellow

Low Priority (steady lamp):Staff Steady whiteDuty Steady whitePersonal Attention Steady whiteRoutine Steady whiteNurse Present Steady greenAide Present Steady yellow

System Status:Comm. Fault No dome light indicationCode Fault No dome light indicationLamp Fault No dome light indication

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Operating Instructions

LI380, LI384A, LI386-seriesDome/Zone Light Operation

SF250 Staff PresenceStation Operationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 37: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 25Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

This section provides instructions for Tek-CARE® NC300™II software configuration andprogramming. This process must be carried out by qualified administrative personnel prior togeneral staff operation. Once completed, the information should require minimal program-ming changes to comply with periodic facility changes.

A menu tree is provided in Figure 17 to show all of the available menus, functions and howthey interrelate. It should be used as a reference for each of the menus and functions that aredescribed in this section. Each item will be listed by its menu or function name and will befollowed by a description. All buttons referenced are located on the master station. Certainfunctions will require the use of additional control keys, which will be indicated on screenat the bottom of display screen.

Menu items are selected by pressing the associated number key as indicated. To return tothe previous menu press the * key.

If usernames and passwords are active, the user will be prompted to enter them at appropriatemenu transition points. Certain critical menu functions require confirmation beforeexecution. Prompts will be displayed when necessary. NOTE: Certain menu functions will

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stations

Figure 17 – Menu Map. NOTE: There is a larger copy of this drawingbefore the Programming Sheets.

Station Information

Master Assignments

Enter Zone Box

MASTER PROGRAMMING1 Set Master ID2 Key Press Tones On/Off3 Toggle Pre-Announce Tones4 Assign Master Zones5 Assign Call Responses

Database will be transmitted

PAGER MENU

1 Pager Zone/Call Settings2 Assign Pagers to Rooms3 Local Printing Only

Toggles state when selected

2 Monitor3 Bath4 Emergency5 Code6 Fire7 Requests

Monitoring

System will reboot

Local database will be restored

Detects new or removed stations

Restores defaults

Zone Data will

Toggles state when selected

1 Staff Routine Duty

7 Enabled Extended Printing

Password Level Requirements

User Names and Passwords

Dialing Methods1. Normal Dialing2. 3 Digit Dialing3. 4 Digit Dialing

Master Information

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

4 Local Paging Only5 Central Paging/Local Prn6 Transmit Resets to Pagers

Future Expansion Function9

Displays incoming call debugging information fromstations in coded format

2

Displays software version information3

1 Set Time2 Set Date

Set Overtimes

6 Offline Data to Central

be displayed

Displays enabled dialing method5

MAIN MENU1 View System Settings2 Reconfiguration3 System Functions

6 Enable PS/2 Keyboard

4 System Diagnostics5 Execute a Custom Page

7 Initiate Locator Link8 Master Instant Messaging9 Master Call Transfer

VIEW MENUS1 View Remote Stations2 View Master Station3 View a Zone

RECONFIGURATION1 Program Master2 Program Station3 Transmit Database4 Program Pager/Print5 Set Password Levels

System Functions

1 Set Time & Date2 Enter Timeout for Overtimes3 Monitoring4 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time5 Reboot Entire System

7 Detect System Stations8 Restore System Default

1 Set Time & Date

3 Monitoring4 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time5 Reboot Entire System6 Restore Local Database7 Detect System Stations8 Restore System Defaults

Cap Code & Message Entry Box

6 Set Username/Passwd7 Enable Bedout Call8 Alternate Dialing

1 View System Masters

1

2

3

4

5

6

9 Program Roving Phone

Future Expansion Function7

Toggles state between membraneswitch on the console and the PS/2keyboard port.

2 View Station Poll Cycle3 About Software Versions

Diagnostics

8Activates Master Instant MessagingFunction

Activates Master Transfer Function9

5 Check Dialing Method

STATION PROGRAMMING1 Program Room ID2 Station On/Offline3 Station Privacy On/Off4 Station Paging On/Off5 Program Custom Label 16 Program Custom Label 27 Program Station Zones

9 Duty Station Call Response8 Station Priority

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Pager Assignments

Pager Information

Minutes box1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Time Set Box (24 hour format)

Date Set Box

Toggles state when selected

Enables Normal DialingEnables 3 Digit DialingEnables 4 Digit Dialing

1

2

3

4

5

3

2

1

12

3

1

2

7

Enables Local Paging Only

Enables Central Paging with Local Printing

Enables Local Printing Only4

5

Sends data from offlineprogrammed Master Station to Central Eq.

6

Enables Reset Suppression6

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Programs Room ID

Sets Station On/Offline

Sets Station Privacy On/Off

Sets Station Paging On/Off

Programs Custom Label 1

Programs Custom Label 2

Programs Station's Zones

Sets Station's Priority Level

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Enter Room

Number

Sets Duty Station's Call Responses9

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 38: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

26 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

erase system programming and affect operational characteristics. Before performing anymenu functions, resolve all patient calls and other important system activity.

Main Menu – Press the blue MENU button on the master station. This provides access tothe first menu available and is the basic point of entry for all system configuration andprogramming functions.

1 View System Settings – This displays the View Menus menu.

2 Reconfiguration – This displays the Reconfiguration menu.

3 System Functions – This displays the System Functions menu.

4 System Diagnostics – This displays the Diagnostics menu.

5 Execute a Custom Page – This menu function is only accessible if Local Pag-ing Only has been enabled (refer to Pager Menu) and requires the use of a key-board. This function can be accessed by the master station console, but is morefully supported by the keyboard feature. This function allows a user to enter a 3-digit pager cap code and a message up to 36 characters long. The user types in thecap code, a priority code, and the desired message, and then hits ENTER or # tosend it. The following priority codes are supported:

A – Regular (Routine), defaultB – Medium (Emergency)C – High (Code)

6 Enable PS/2 Keyboard – Selecting this function toggles between using themaster station console and the keyboard.

7 Initiate Locator Link – This function for future development of the personnellocation interface function. This expansion feature is currently not available.

8 Master Instant Messaging – (Feature not currently available.) Selecting thisfunction opens a window that is used to send text messages to other master sta-tions on the system. When the window opens, a user enters the single-digit masternumber (1 – 8) for the recipient master station, and then enters a text message upto forty characters long. Then the user presses the ENTER key (in PS/2 keyboardmode) or the # key (in master station console mode). The message will be dis-played on the recipient master station, and can be cleared after it is read by press-ing the ESCape key (in PS/2 keyboard mode) or the black RESET key (in masterstation console mode).

9 Master Call Transfer – Selecting this function allows a user to transfer the calland zone responsibilities of a master station to another master station on the sys-tem. The user is prompted to enter the Master ID number for the master to receivethe transferred information. To exit this mode, press RESET on the master consoleor ESCape on the keyboard. Multiple master transfers cannot be linear (i.e., trans-fer from master 1 to master 2 and then transfer master 2 to master 3). If multiplemaster transfers are desired, users must transfer them in a parallel fashion (i.e.,transfer master 1 to master 3, and then transfer master 2 to master 3). NOTE: Thefunctions initiated by the F11 and F12 keys as described in the KeyboardSection will not work on the master stations involved in the transfer process(sending transfer or receiving transfer). These functions are intentionallylocked out in transfer mode.

0 MSTR/TI Fault Tone Off – This function is only displayed if an NC304/NC304LCD Master Station or NC364A Telephone Interface is in a fault mode.(Therefore, this feature is not shown in Figure 17 – Menu Map.) Selecting this

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 39: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 27Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

function silences a telephone interface fault tone, but does not eliminate visualfault indications. (This option is no longer available.)

View Menus – Press the MENU button and then press 1. This menu provides functions toreview the various system devices and their associated configurations. When a menu selec-tion is made, the system displays the appropriate information. Not all information is visibleon one screen. Pressing the # key will page down to display additional information.

1 View Remote Stations – This displays a station information box. Entering aroom and bed number causes that room’s information to be displayed for review.

2 View Master Station – This displays the master station information box for themaster station that this function is executed on.

3 View a Zone – This displays a zone entry box (and automatically trigger theALPHA key). The user can then enter a zone letter, which will cause the zone’sinformation to be displayed. Pressing the # key instead of a zone letter will displayall zones on the system.

Reconfiguration – Press the MENU button and then press 2. This menu provides systemand device reconfiguration functions.

1 Program Master – This displays the Master Programming menu.

2 Program Station – This displays the station programming menu. The user canthen enter a room and bed number for the station to be changed.

3 Transmit Database – This function shares the programming information with theother master stations and the central equipment. This feature must only be usedwhen offline programming has been performed on a master station, to allow datathat is stored on only one master station to be shared with the rest of the system.Programming changes made to the system while in normal operating mode are auto-matically updated to the other master stations and the central equipment.

4 Program Pager/Print – This displays the Pager Menu.

5 Set Password Levels – This displays the password requirements information box.Information box navigation and setting controls are displayed at the bottom of thescreen. Password requirements may be turned on or off for each item listed.

6 Set Username/Password – This menu option allows a user to enter and changeusernames and associated passwords. A maximum of 20 usernames and passwordscan be entered. When accessed, the user enters his/her username. If the usernameentered is new to the system, the system jumps to the new username entry section.The new user then enters a password in the password box, and repeats it in theconfirmation box, pressing the # or ENTER key after each entry. If the usernameentered already exists, the system expects the correct password to be entered intothe “current password” box. The username and password may then be deleted bypressing the * or the BACKSPACE key, or they may be changed.

The factory default system username is “ADMIN” and the password is “X.”

7 Enable Bedout Call – This toggles the enable/disable status for bed out calls.When enabled, this menu option will read “Disable Bedout Call.” When enabled,this feature changes a Routine type call to a Bed Out type call, if the call placementis held constantly for more than 7 seconds. This feature works in conjunction withHill-Rom® SideCom® type beds and the RY351B Hill-Rom® Adapter from TekTone®.NOTE: This function can only be set at the primary master station.

8 Alternate Dialing – This displays the Dialing Methods menu.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 40: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

28 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

9 Program Roving Phone – This menu item is for the future development of addi-tional wireless telephone interface functions. This expansion feature is currentlynot available.

System Functions – Press the MENU button and then press 3. This menu provides access tofunctions that control or set core system operations.

1 Set Time & Date – This displays the Set Time and Set Date submenu.NOTE: This function can only be set at the primary master station.

1 Set Time – This opens the Time Set box and allows the user to enter thesystem time. NOTE: This entry must be made in 24-hour format (i.e.,3:00 PM is entered as 15:00).

2 Set Date – This opens the Date Set box and allows the user to enter thesystem date.

2 Enter Timeout for Overtimes – This displays the Enter Timeout for Overtimesmenu. This menu lists the call types that can be set for overtime. The user choosesa call type (1 – 7), and then enters a minute value from 00 (off) to 15 in the “min-utes box.” This value is the length of time a call can remain unanswered before itis considered overtime and is upgraded in call type. NOTE: Items that are notcurrently supported in this version of software will be gray (“grayed out”).

3 Monitoring – This displays the Monitoring box and clears any previously storedroom number information. The user enters a room and bed number to be moni-tored, and then presses #, repeating the procedure for additional stations. Afterrooms have been entered, pressing # activates monitoring. Pressing any key ceasesroom monitoring, as will any incoming call for which the master is zoned.

4 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time – This toggles the state of the time display. Observethe time in the bottom right hand corner while using this function.

5 Reboot Entire System – This triggers a “soft reset.” It is similar to resetting thesystem by powering it down (often known as a “hard reset”), but power is notremoved from the system. System programming information will not be lost whenthis function is performed. NOTE: This function resets calls placed on the sys-tem that were not activated by a physically latching switch and must there-fore only be performed if the system has no calls pending!

6 Restore Local Database – This causes the master station to obtain program-ming information from the central equipment. This feature must be used if themaster station was used on a different system or is a new/replacement master, andneeds to be updated with local system information.

7 Detect System Stations – This causes the system to check for added or removedstations on the system. When activated, “Please Wait” is displayed, and then thesystem is reset. New stations are assigned default numbers and removed stationsare dropped from memory. Preexisting programming information for stations thathave not been changed will remain the same. NOTE: This function must beperformed the very first time the system is powered up.

8 Restore System Defaults – This causes the system to delete all previously pro-grammed information and return to default settings. This also causes the system tolook for new or removed system hardware. NOTE: This process must be per-formed with caution, because the deleted information cannot be restored andwill need to be programmed again!

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 41: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 29Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diagnostics Menu – Press menu, and then press 4. This menu provides diagnostic functionsfor system troubleshooting.

1 View System Masters – This function displays an information box thatdisplays master status indicators. Up to 8 master stations can be connected to asystem, and they are designated 1 through 8. The status of each is indicated asdescribed by the information box’s legend.

2 View Station Poll Cycle – This function displays incoming call debugginginformation from patient stations in a coded format. This data is useful to factorypersonnel under some troubleshooting circumstances.

3 About Software Versions – This function displays the three versions of soft-ware on the nurse call system. They are the MAIN.EXE file (in the nurses’ masterstation), the CENTRAL.BIN file (in the central equipment) and the POLLING.BINfile (in the central equipment). These are the software components that can beupgraded in the field.

5 Check Dialing Method – This function displays the enabled dialing method:normal, 3-digit, or 4-digit.

Master Programming – Press MENU, press 2 and then press 1. This menu provides ac-cess to functions for the master station. These must be set individually for each masterstation at the master station’s location. Each menu item displays the master station’s infor-mation box, and the chosen item will already be selected. The user can then make changesto that field as desired. On-screen instructions are also provided to guide the user.

1 Set Master ID – This allows the user to set the address number of the masterstation. Master station addresses are 1 through 8.

2 Key Press Tones On/Off – This function controls the reassurance tone emittedfor each key press on the master station.

3 Toggle Pre-Announce Tones – This function controls the pre-announce toneemitted from the patient station when an audio path is established.

4 Assign Master Zones – This function controls which zones the master receivescalls from. Any or all zones (A through P) may be assigned to each master station.NOTE: If all zones are deactivated, the master station will not receive any calls!Only qualified personnel may make changes to these settings!

5 Assign Call Responses – This function controls the types of calls the masterstation will see for the zones that have been assigned to it. Any or all may be activeor inactive. NOTE: Critical call types, such as Code Call, can be disabled bythis function! Only qualified personnel may make changes to these settings!

6 Offline Data to Central – This function sends custom call label settings from anoffline programmed master station to the central equipment for system use. Users mustperform this function when a master station has had offline programming performed.

Station Programming – Press MENU, press 2, press 2 and then enter a room and bednumber. This menu provides access to functions for stations. Each menu item displays thestation’s information box, and the chosen item will already be selected. The user can thenmake changes to that field as desired. On-screen instructions are also provided to guide theuser. Note: After making a station programming change, perform the Transmit Data-base function (press MENU, press 2 and then press 3).

1 Program Room ID – Allows user to change the default ID Number to Architec-tural Room Numbering using both alpha and numeric characters. Bed numbers arealso assigned with this function using alpha and numeric characters.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 42: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

30 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

2 Station On/Offline – Allows user to activate or deactivate the station.

3 Station Privacy On/Off – Allows user to set the patient station’s privacy status.If active, the master station cannot receive audio from the patient station unless thepatient initiates the call. The patient station will still be able to hear audio from themaster station.

4 Station Paging On/Off – Allows user to set paging status. If active, the patientstation will be included during audio pages. If it is inactive, the patient station willnot be included during audio pages.

5 Program Custom Label 1 – Allows user to enter a custom 16-character label. Itis recommended that the PS/2 Keyboard option be used for entry.

6 Program Custom Label 2 – Allows user to enter a custom 16-character labelfor the second custom label (available for dual patient stations only).

7 Program Station Zones – Assigns any or all zones, A through P.

8 Station Priority – Allows user to set the patient station’s priority level (Routine,Pers. Attn. or Priority). Note: SF380-series stations must be programmed for Per-sonal Attn. Priority Level.

9 Duty Station Call Response – Controls the types of calls that the duty station willrespond to.

The following information is also displayed in the station information box:

• Port Connection – Hardware defined by which port stations areconnected to on the CE.

• Address – Hardware defined by the dipswitch settings on the individual pa-tient station.

• Priority Status may also be changed on this screen by pressing the“Priority” (blue) key on the master station. Press the “Priority” key until thedesired status is displayed.

Pager Menu – Press MENU, press 2 and then press 4. This menu provides access to thevarious functions for local radio paging applications. The system can support up to 48individual radio pagers. Default pager numbers (i.e., cap codes) are 400–447.

1 Pager Zone/Call Settings – This function is used to set the zone assignments (Athrough P) and call response types for a specific radio pager.

2 Assign Pagers to Rooms – This function allows any or all of the 48 radio pagersto be assigned to a specific room.

3 Local Printing Only, 4 Local Paging Only, 5 Central Paging/Local Prn –These three menu functions work together, and only one of them may be active atany time. The active function is indicated by gray text (“graying out”). The op-tions that are not active are displayed in normal text. 3 Local Printing Only sendsthe data generated and relevant to the master station to the local master stationserial port. If a serial printer is connected to this port, the data will print out as eachevent occurs. 4 Local Paging Only causes the data generated and relevant to themaster station to be formatted for RF paging and output to the local master stationserial port. If a properly configured NC365A RF transmitter is connected to thisport, the formatted call data will be sent to pocket paging units. When this mode isselected, the most recent pager transmission is displayed at the bottom of the screen(NC304 only). (NOTE: Only one master can be in Local Paging Only mode atone time. If another master is set to this mode, the first master’s setting willautomatically reset to Central Paging/Local Prn mode.) 5 Central Paging/Lo-

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 43: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 31Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

cal Prn causes system call information to be formatted for RF paging and sent toone of the serial ports on the central equipment (refer to Figure 26—NC300™IISystem Connection Diagram). If a properly configured NC365A RF transmitteris connected to this port, the formatted call data will be sent to pocket paging units.The 3 Local Printing Only function will also be active, as described earlier in thisparagraph.

6 Transmit Resets to Pagers – This menu function prevents call reset notificationsfrom being sent out via the RF pocket paging system, if one is connected.

7 Enable Extended Printing – This function works in conjunction with the LocalPrinting function described under the Pager Menu. When this function is acti-vated, menu activities are printed in addition to the normal call data supported bythe Local Printing function. This provides a record of menu activation and of whichmenu functions were subsequently executed. Selecting this menu item togglesbetween the enabled and disabled statuses.

Dialing Methods – Press Menu, press 2 and then press 8. This menu provides access to thealternate dialing methods available on the system. NOTE: Implementing a new dialingmethod will erase all station ID information and reboot the system. This is done toprepare the system for the new data format. Other programming information will stillbe retained. When these modes are activated, the system’s master to master audiocommunications features will be disabled, and a new option that is accessed through thismenu will appear: Master to Master Audio.

1 Normal Dialing – This is the default system dialing method. Dialing consists ofa 4-digit room number plus a 1-digit bed number (both bed 1 and bed 2 whenusing dual patient stations). Default numbers are assigned as described in the Sys-tem Installation section under Equipment Configuration and Settings.

2 3-Digit Dialing – This reduces dialing of room numbers to 3 digits and no bednumber. This method always assumes the bed number is bed 1 (or if it is a dualstation, both beds 1 and 2). Default numbers are assigned as described in the Sys-tem Installation section under Equipment Configuration and Settings, but donot have the leading 0. When programing room number information in this mode,the first digit and bed numbers are locked out. If calling a dual bed station, theassumed bed number 1 also talks to bed number 2, since their audio is part of thesame circuit.

3 4-Digit Dialing – This reduces dialing of room numbers to 3 digits plus a 1-digitbed number (both bed 1 and bed 2 when using dual patient stations). Default num-bers are assigned as described in the System Installation section under Equip-ment Configuration and Settings, but do not have the leading 0. When program-ing room number information in this mode, the first digit and second bed number(when using dual stations) will be locked out.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming using NC304,NC304LCD Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 44: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

32 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A PS/2 keyboard port is provided to allow connection of a standard PC-type keyboard to theNC304 Master Station for easier data entry. This must only be performed by qualified admin-istrative personnel.

The keyboard is used to edit data and to enter custom radio paging messages, and must notbe used to respond to patient calls or for similar nurse call functions. NOTE: While usingthe keyboard, entries are case sensitive. Zone letters and alpha characters used in room andbed numbers must all be capitalized, because the master station console cannot generatelower case letters. Certain keys on the following list must never be used and are so indi-cated—such as the comma, apostrophe, colon, semicolon and slash. The space bar andshifted characters such as ! and @ must not be used in room numbers, because they cannotbe generated at the master station. These characters may be used in room labels.

Esc Key – This acts just as the “RESET” (black) key does on the master station. It cancels mostfunctions and escape menu activities.F1 Key – This acts just as the “MENU” (blue) key does on the master station. It displays the MainMenu.F2–F10 Keys – No function.F11 Key – Uploads or downloads the station database to a laptop computer (see following section).F12 Key – Updates software (see following section).1–0 Number Keys – As labeled.~ ‘ Key – As labeled.Tab Key – No function.Caps Lock Key – Do not use—see information at the beginning of this section.Shift Key – Do not use—see information at the beginning of this section.Crtl Key – No function.Windows Key – No function.Alt Key – No function.Space Bar – As labeled—see information at the beginning of this section.A–Z Keys – As labeled._ - Key – As labeled.+ = Key – As labeled.| \ Key – As labeled.Backspace Key – This acts just as the * key on the master station. It allows the user to back upthrough the menus and the programming fields.{ [ Key – As labeled.} ] Key – As labeled.: ; Key – Do not use." ' Key – Do not use.< , Key – Do not use.> . Key – Do not use.? / Key – Do not use.Enter Key – This acts like the master station’s # key. It is used to accept and save most functions.Insert Key – No function.Delete Key – No function.Home Key – No function.End Key – No function.Page Up/Down Keys – No function.Arrow Keys – No function.Num Lock Key – This must always be active (LED on)./ Key – Do not use.* Key – See Backspace Key functions.Prt Scrn/SysRq Key – No function.Scroll Lock Key – No function.Pause/Break Key – Do not use.Num Lock LED – This must always be on.Caps Lock LED – This must always be on.Scroll Lock LED – This must be off.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Keyboard Functions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 45: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 33Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

PLEASE READ THIS ENTIRE SECTION PRIOR TO UPGRADING ANY SOFTWARECOMPONENTS!!!

See NC306 Software Component Upgrades for NC306 Masters. To upgrade the varioussoftware components that operate the system, the following equipment must be prepared:

• A laptop computer with DOS or Command Prompt capability. The batch files pro-vided with software upgrades will automatically configure the COM1 port for com-munication. NOTE: The laptop computer must be running on battery power, andmust not be connected to 120 VAC power.

• A properly configured null-modem cable:DB9 Pin DB9 Pin3 ——————————————22 ——————————————37 ——————————————88 ——————————————75 ——————————————56 ——————————————44 ——————————————6

• A PS/2 keyboard.

The user will receive the software component upgrade files via e-mail or diskette. If theyhave been received via e-mail, the user must open the message and left-click File and thenleft-click Save Attachments. This displays a save window. The user must left-click Desk-top and then left-click Save. This will save the files on the Desktop area for usage. Whenthe user is done, the files may be moved to another area of the computer for storage, ordragged into the Recycle Bin for deletion.

If the files were received on a diskette, the user must insert the diskette into the laptop’s diskdrive (typically the A: drive). The user must then left double-click the My Computer icon onthe Desktop. A window will open, displaying the various drives on the computer. The usermust left double-click the drive the diskette was inserted into (typically the A: drive, labeled3½ Floppy A:). This will cause the window to change to the contents of the diskette. The usermust select all files by left-clicking on the topmost file and then hold down the Shift key andleft-click on the bottommost file. All the available files should be highlighted at this time. Theuser then presses Crtl-C to copy the files to the Clipboard. The user may then close thewindow by left-clicking the small X button in the upper right-hand corner of the window. Thewindow will disappear, displaying the laptop’s Desktop area. The user next presses Crtl-V,which will paste the files from the clipboard onto the desktop. The files will appear as variousicons on the Desktop. When the user is done, the files may be moved to another area of thecomputer for storage, or dragged into the Recycle Bin for deletion.

The user will typically receive at least three files in one of the following sets:Set 1: Console Set 2: Central Set 3: Pollingtransfer.exe transfer.exe transfer.exemain.exe central.bin polling.bininstallm.bat installc.bat installp.bat

On occasion, additional files may be sent. If this occurs, a readme.txt file will be includedthat will contain additional instructions for the upgrade process.

Connect one end of the null modem cable to the COM1 port on the laptop computer. Con-nect the other end of the null modem cable to the serial port of the master station that is tobe upgraded. NOTE: Central equipment software components must be upgraded from theprimary master station (displays double asterisk in upper left hand corner of associatedVGA monitor and is addressed as master #1). Master station software components are up-graded locally at each master station.

NC304 series & NC351(A)series Software ComponentUpgrades

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 46: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

34 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Connect the PS/2 keyboard to the master station PS/2 keyboard port and ensure that it isenabled via the software menus (refer to Main Menu under the System Configurationand Programming section).

A username and password are required to enter the following modes. Refer toReconfiguration under the System Configuration and Programming section if one doesnot already exist. NOTE: If the user is upgrading the central.bin or polling.bin files, thekey on the Central Equipment must be turned to a horizontal position.

Press F12 on the master station keyboard and enter a valid username and password. A menuwill appear with the following options and a cautionary message for users who have notread this section of the manual:

1 Update CONSOLE Processor (uses installm.bat and main.exe files)2 Update CENTRAL Processor (uses installc.bat and central.bin files)3 Update POLLING Processor (uses installp.bat and polling.bin files)

On the laptop, use the mouse to left-double-click on the appropriate install*.bat file thatwas previously placed on the desktop. (The laptop screen will display a command promptwindow that asks the user to hit the space bar to begin. Do not press the space bar yet.) Onthe PS/2 keyboard connected to the master station, select the menu option (1, 2 or 3) for thesoftware upgrade option you are installing. On the laptop, press the space bar. At this pointthe software transfer will begin. The master station screen will go black and display textindicating that it is receiving the file. During file transfer, the DOS or Command Promptwindow will display rows of “T” symbols to represent the transfer process. Transferring thefile may take several minutes and must not be interrupted.

If the main.exe file is being updated, the master station will reboot. Turn off the centralequipment and then turn it back on.

If either the central.bin or the polling.bin file is being upgraded, after the transfer is com-plete (EOF and a checksum will be displayed), turn off the central equipment and all masterstations. NOTE: Return the key on the central equipment to the vertical position, andthen turn the central equipment and master stations on again. (Failure to return thekey to the vertical position could damage the PM353 card!) Once all devices have bootedup, the upgrade is complete. If an error occurs during a software upgrade, contact the fac-tory for assistance (see cover of manual for phone numbers).

PLEASE READ THIS ENTIRE SECTION PRIOR TO UPGRADING ANY SOFT-WARE COMPONENTS!!! This cannot be performed with NC306 master stations—thesystem must have at least one NC304 series master station. To upload or download thestation database information, you must have the following:

• Three files from TekTone®: give.bat, get.bat and transfer.exe.• A computer that allows an MS-DOS prompt (i.e., Windows 95, 98, ME, XP).• A PS/2 keyboard.• A Tek-CARE® NC300™II system in which the 7 Detect System Stations function has

been performed (located on the 3 System Functions menu).• A properly configured null-modem cable:

DB9 Pin DB9 Pin3——————————————22——————————————37——————————————88——————————————75——————————————56——————————————44——————————————6

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

NC304 series & NC351(A)series Software ComponentUpgradescontinued

Station Database Functions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 47: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 35Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Power up the computer, and copy the three files (give.bat, get.bat and transfer.exe) to thecomputer’s Desktop. Be certain that the computer has Caps Lock on (type is in all capitalletters).

Connect one end of the null modem cable to the computer’s COM1 port. Connect the otherend of the null modem cable to the serial port on the primary system master station—master#1 has two asterisks (**) in the upper left corner of the screen.

Connect the PS/2 keyboard to the same master station’s PS/2 keyboard port (on the rear ofthe master) and ensure that it is enabled via the software menus (refer to Main Menu underthe System Configuration and Programming section).

A username and password are required to enter the following modes. Refer toReconfiguration under the System Configuration and Programming section if one doesnot already exist.

Press F11 on the keyboard and enter a valid username and password. A menu will appearwith the following options and a cautionary message for users who have not read this sec-tion of the manual:

1 Upload Station Database2 Download Station Database3 Exit to DOS

To upload a copy of the station database from the master station to the computer, click on thecomputer’s Start Button and then on Run. Type “get stations.db” in the box and then click OK.Next, select menu option 1 Upload Station Database on the master station keyboard to start thefile transfer. When the process is complete, the master station will return to normal operation anda copy of the file (called stations.db) will be on the computer’s Desktop.

To download a copy of the station database from the computer to the master station, click onthe computer’s Start Button and then on Run. Type “give stations.db” in the box and thenclick OK. Next, select menu option 2 Download Station Database on the master stationkeyboard to start the file transfer. Then perform the function 3 Transmit Database locatedin the Reconfiguration Menu (the transmit database function will take 15–20 minutes tocomplete). Finally, perform the function Offline Data to Central located in the MasterProgramming Menu (press the MENU button, and then press 2, 1, 6).

A user may engage the DOS mode on the master station by selecting 3 Exit to DOS. Typemain at the command prompt (C:\>) and press enter (PS/2 keyboard) or # (master console)to return the master to normal operation.

The stations.db file may be edited globally by using a program called offline.exe, which islocated on the master station. If the master station is put into DOS mode (as describedearlier in this section), the user may run the offline.exe program by typing offline and thenpressing the enter key on the PS/2 keyboard. This will start the program and allow editingof the database file. These commands are GLOBAL and affect all stations and/or settings.

Before making any changes to the stations.db file, select menu option 1 Upload StationDatabase on the master station (as shown above) to back up the current file to a laptopcomputer. This is not necessary if all stations are currently configured to system defaults,because system defaults can be restored via menu functions.

The menu structure for the offline.exe program is shown in Figure 18. While working inoffline.exe, press the BACKSPACE key to return to the previous menu.

Station Database Functionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 48: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

36 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Station Database Functionscontinued

Figure 18 – Offline Programming Map Reference

Select Function

9 Global Message Assgmnts

1 Global Status Change2 Global Privacy Change3 Global Paging Change4 Global Zoning Change5 Global Response Change6 Global Priority Change7 Global Dome Commands8 Global Call Declaration

Station Status1 Set All Stations ONLINE2 Set All Stations OFFLINE

Station Status1 Set All Privacy ON2 Set All Privacy OFF

Station Status1 Set All Paging ENABLED2 Set All Paging DISABLED

Station Status1 Set All Zones ASSIGNED2 Set All Zones UNASSIGNED

Single Zone Designation

Station Status1 Set All Calls ASSIGNED2 Set All Calls UNASSIGNEDA-P Toggle Response Status

Station Status1 Set All Stations to ROUTINE2 Set All Stations to PERSONAL ATTN.3 Set All Stations to Priority

Dome Settings

0 Set Dome For CODE1 Set Dome For FIRE2 Set Dome For EMERGENCY3 Set Dome For MONITOR4 Set Dome For BATH5 Set Dome For CORD OUT6 Set Dome For PRIORITY7 Set Dome For DUTY8 Set Dome For PERS. ATTN.9 Set Dome For ROUTINE

H HELP -- Display Valid CommandsV VIEW System Factory DefaultsR RESTORE System Factory Defaults

Declaration Settings0 Edit Message CODE1 Edit Message FIRE2 Edit Message EMERGENCY3 Edit Message MONITOR4 Edit Message BATH5 Edit Message CORD OUT6 Edit Message PRIORITY7 Edit Message DUTY8 Edit Message PERS. ATTN9 Edit Message STAT REQUESTA Edit Message NURSE REQUESTB Edit Message AIDE REQUESTC Edit Message STAFFD Edit MessageE Edit MessageF Edit MessageG Edit MessageH Edit MessageI Edit MessageJ Edit MessageG Edit Message

Message Assignments0 CODE CALL BUTTON1 FIRE ALERT BUTTON2 EMERGENCY BUTTON3 MONITOR BUTTON4 BATH CALL BUTTON5 CORD OUT INDICATION6 PRIORITY BUTTON7 DUTY STATION CALL BUTTON8 PERSONAL ATTENTION CALL BUTTON9 ROUTINE CALL BUTTONA STAT REQUESTB NURSE REQUESTC AIDE REQUESTD STAFF CALL BUTTON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 49: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 37Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

1 Global Status Change – Selecting this menu option provides these two functions:

1 Set All Stations ONLINE – Sets all stations in the database to online status.

2 Set All Stations OFFLINE – Sets all stations in the database to offline status. NOTE:This will make all stations in the system inactive.

2 Global Privacy Change – Selecting this menu option provides these two functions:

1 Set All Privacy ON – Sets all stations in the database to privacy active.

2 Set All Privacy OFF – Sets all stations in the database to privacy inactive.

3 Global Paging Change – Selecting this menu option provides these two functions:

1 Set All Paging ENABLED – Sets all stations enabled for receiving audio pages.

2 Set All Paging DISABLED – Sets all stations disabled for receiving audio pages.

4 Global Zoning Change – Selecting this menu option provides these three functions:

1 Set All Zones ASSIGNED – Sets all zones (A-P) active for all stations on the system.

2 Set All Zones UNASSIGNED – Sets all zones (A-P) inactive for all stations on thesystem. NOTE: This command will disable all system indication of station calls. Usersmust verify that zones are properly set after programming is completed!!

Single Zone Designation – Users can access this function simply by entering the zoneletter (A-P) that they want activated for all stations. If the user enters “A,” then ZoneA will be activated for all stations on the system.

5 Global Response Change – Selecting this menu option provides these three functions:

1 Set All Calls ASSIGNED – Sets all call types (Routine, Code, etc.) active for display.

2 Set All Calls UNASSIGNED – Sets all call types (Routine, Code, etc.) inactive fordisplay. NOTE: This command disables all system indication of station calls. Verifythat call displays are properly set after programming is completed!!

A-P Toggle Response Status – Sets the selected call type active for displayaccording to the following list:

A – CodeB – FireC – EmergencyD – MonitorE – BathF – Cord OutG – PriorityH – DutyI – Personal AttentionJ – Routine/StaffK–P – Currently reserved for custom applications

Stat/Nurse/Aide call types are not selectable for this function. This function may beperformed multiple times to activate several types of call displays.

6 Global Priority Change – Selecting this menu option provides these three functions:

1 Set All Stations to ROUTINE – Sets all stations to Routine call level.

2 Set All Stations to PERSONAL ATTN. – Sets all stations to Personal Attention calllevel.

3 Set All Stations to PRIORITY – Sets all stations to Priority call level.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Station Database Functionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 50: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

38 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

7 Global Dome Commands – Selecting this menu option provides the following 13 func-tions. NOTE: Changes are stored in the NC304(LCD) Master Station, and must be repro-grammed if master #1 is replaced for any reason.

0 Set Dome For CODE – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Code calls. The factory system default setting is 96.

1 Set Dome For FIRE – This allows the user to change the lamp and tone patterns forFire calls. The factory system default setting is 75.

2 Set Dome For EMERGENCY – This allows the user to change the dome light andtone patterns for Emergency calls. The factory system default setting is 72.

3 Set Dome For MONITOR – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Monitor calls. The factory system default setting is 71.

4 Set Dome For BATH – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Bath calls. The factory system default setting is 68.

5 Set Dome For CORD OUT – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Cord Out calls. The factory system default setting is 68.

6 Set Dome For PRIORITY – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Priority calls. The factory system default setting is 68.

7 Set Dome For DUTY – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Duty calls. The factory system default setting is 52.

8 Set Dome For PERS. ATTN. – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Priority calls. The factory system default setting is 68.

9 Set Dome For ROUTINE – This allows the user to change the dome light and tonepatterns for Routine calls. The factory system default setting is 52.

H HELP – Display Valid Commands – This window lists all valid dome light and tonecombinations. Users must consult this list for reference when changing dome light andtone patterns. Color references indicate which light is being set and rate terms refer totone settings. Columns at the top indicate dome light activation patterns (i.e., steady,flashing, etc.).

V VIEW System Factory Defaults – This window provides a reference list for allFactory system default dome light and tone pattern settings.

R RESTORE System Factory Defaults – This function resets all dome light and tonepatterns back to Factory system defaults. NOTE: Users must verify that all call typesprovide the desired call indication after programming is completed!!

8 Global Call Declaration – Selecting this menu option provides the following 21 functions.NOTE: Call declarations can be a maximum 10 characters, and affect all stations.Press EN-TER when finished editing. If changes are made, execute the Offline Data to Central com-mand from the Master Programming Menu (press MENU, 2, 1 and then press 6).

0 Edit Message CODE – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Code calls (i.e., CODE could be changed to CRASH CART).

1 Edit Message FIRE – This function allows users to alter the displayed description ofFire calls.

2 Edit Message EMERGENCY – This function allows users to alter thedisplayed description of Emergency calls.

3 Edit Message MONITOR – This function allows users to alter the displayed de-scription of Monitor calls.

4 Edit Message BATH – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Bath calls.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Station Database Functionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 51: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 39Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

5 Edit Message CORD OUT – This function allows users to alter the displayed de-scription of Cord Out calls.

6 Edit Message PRIORITY – This function allows users to alter the displayed descrip-tion of Priority calls.

7 Edit Message DUTY – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Duty calls.

8 Edit Message PERS. ATTN – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Personal Attention calls.

9 Edit Message STAT REQUEST – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Stat Request calls.

A Edit Message NURSE REQUEST – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Nurse Request calls.

B Edit Message AIDE REQUEST – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Aide Request calls.

C Edit Message STAFF REQUEST – This function allows users to alter the displayeddescription of Staff Request calls.

D through G are reserved for custom message applications.

9 Global Message Assgmnts – This series of functions reassigns existing assigned labels tothe various hardware call inputs on the patient stations. If the call label declarations havebeen changed in the 8 Global Call Declaration menu, the changes will also be displayed inthe selection window. Multiple assignments of the same label are permitted. When one of theoptions below is selected, the current list of hardware input labels is displayed, and the usermay then create new label assignments. NOTE: These functions will not affect hardwarepriorities. For example, if Code Call inputs are reassigned to Bath Calls, they will still havethe display priority of Code Calls. This functionality cannot be altered through software.Selecting this menu option provides these 14 functions:

0 CODE CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Code call hardware input label.

1 FIRE ALERT BUTTON – Reassigns the Fire call hardware input label.

2 EMERGENCY BUTTON – Reassigns the Emergency call hardware input label.

3 MONITOR BUTTON – Reassigns the Monitor call hardware input label.

4 BATH CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Bath call hardware input label.

5 CORD OUT ANNUNCIATION – Reassigns the Cord Out call hardware input label.

6 PRIORITY BUTTON – Reassigns the Priority call hardware input label.

7 DUTY STATION CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Duty call hardware input label.

8 PERSONAL ATTENTION CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Personal Attention callhardware input label.

9 ROUTINE CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Routine call hardware input label.

A STAT REQUEST – Reassigns the Stat call hardware input label.

B NURSE REQUEST – Reassigns the Nurse Request call hardware input label.

C AIDE REQUEST – Reassigns the Aide Request call hardware input label.

D STAFF CALL BUTTON – Reassigns the Staff call hardware input label.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Station Database Functionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 52: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

40 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Station Privacy – Allows the user to set the patient station’s privacy status. If active, themaster station cannot receive audio from the patient station unless the patient initiates thecall. The patient station will still be able to hear audio from the master station.

Show a Remote Station’s Privacy:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “PRIVACY”

(red) button to show the station’s current privacy setting.• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Set a Remote Station’s Privacy On/Off:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “PRIVACY”

(red) button to show the station’s current privacy setting.• Press the “PRIVACY” (red) button again to toggle privacy on/off.• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice to save the current setting.

Show All Remote Stations with Privacy On:• Press the “PRIVACY” (red) button. Selector LEDs will light to show which

rooms have Privacy on.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Station Paging On/Off – Allows user to set paging status of remote stations. If active, thepatient station will be included during audio pages. If it is inactive, the patient station will notbe included during audio pages.

• Press the selector button for the desired station, and then press the “ZONE” (blue)button. The LED of the selector button marked “0” indicates station paging status:On to receive pages, or Off to ignore pages.

• Press the “0” button to toggle paging on/off.• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Station Priority – Patient stations can be set to one of three priority levels: Routine, PersonalAttention or Priority. The default is Routine. A Routine station places a low priority call thatcan be reset from either the master station or from the originating station. A Personal Atten-tion station also places a low priority call, but the call can only be reset from the originatingstation. A Priority station places a medium priority call, indicated at the master with a blinkingselector LED and a rapid tone. A Priority call can only be reset at the originating station. Note:SF380-series stations must be programmed for Personal Attn. Priority Level.

Show a Remote Station’s Priority:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “PRIORITY”

(yellow) button to show the station’s current Priority level.• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Change a Remote Station’s Priority:• Press the selector button for the desired room, and then press the “PRIORITY”

(yellow) button to show the station’s current Priority level.• Each additional press of the “PRIORITY” (yellow) button steps through the

three priorities, indicated by the state of the station selector’s LED: steady forRoutine, slow flash for Personal Attention, or rapid flash for Priority.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice to save the current setting.Show All Personal Attention and Priority Remote Stations:

• Press the “PRIORITY” (yellow) button. Selector LEDs will light to show whichrooms have non-Routine Priority. Selector LEDs will slow flash for PersonalAttention, and rapid flash for Priority.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Program Station Zones – Assigns a remote station to any or all zones, A through P.Show a Remote Station’s Zones:

• Press the selector button for the desired station, and then press the “ZONE”(blue) button. Set zones are shown on the Selector LEDs in the second andthird rows. (The second row shows zones A–J, and the first six keys of the third

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming usingNC306 Master Stations

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 53: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 41Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

row show zones K–P.)• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Set a Remote Station’s Zones:• Press the selector button for the desired station, and then press the “ZONE”

(blue) button. Set zones are shown on the selector button LEDs in the secondand third rows. (The second row shows zones A–J, and the first six buttons ofthe third row show zones K–P.)

• Each press of a zone’s selector button toggles between adding or removing astation from that zone, indicated by the state of that selector button’s LED: Onwhen added to the zone, Off when removed from the zone.

Note: While in this programming mode, the first column of station selector buttonsindicates various settings which can be activated or deactivated. Settings are:

0 – Paging Status On/Offline1 – Station On/Offline2 – Privacy On/Off3 – Routine Call Level4 – Personal Attention Call Level5 – Priority Call Level

• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Station On/Offline – Allows user to activate or deactivate a remote station.• Press the selector button for the desired station, and then press the “ZONE” (blue)

button. The LED of the selector button marked “1” indicates on/offline status.• Press the “1” button to toggle the station status on/offline.• Press the “RESET” (black) button twice when finished.

Assign Master Zones – This function controls which zones the master receives calls from.Any or all zones (A through P) may be assigned to each master station. NOTE: If all zonesare deactivated, the master station will not receive any calls! Only qualified personnel maymake changes to these settings!

• Push the “ZONE” (blue) button. Master’s zones are indicated by the LED status ofthe selector keys in the second and third rows. Zones A–J are shown on thesecond row; zones K–P are shown on the first six keys of the third row.

• To add or remove a zone from the master, press the zone’s key to toggle its status.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Master Station Key-Press Tones On/Off – This function controls the reassurance toneemitted for each key press on the master station. To turn this feature on or off:

• Press the “ZONE” (blue) button.• Press the “0” button to toggle key-press tones on/off.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Toggle Pre-Announce Tones – This function controls the pre-announce tone emitted fromthe patient station when an audio path is established. To turn this feature on or off:

• Press the “ZONE” (blue) button.• Press the “1” button to toggle preannounce tones on/off.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Master Station Guidance LEDs On/Off – Guidance LEDs uses function key LEDs to showwhich functions are currently available. To turn this feature on or off:

• Press the “ZONE” (blue) button.• Press the “2” button to toggle Guidance LEDs on/off.• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Configuration andProgramming usingNC306 Master Stationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 54: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

42 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

System Radio Paging Mode:• Press the “ZONE” (blue) button.• Press the desired mode’s button—its LED will light:

3 – No central radio paging4 – Central paging enabled, call resets not sent to pagers.5 – Central paging enabled, call resets sent to pagers.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button when finished.

Set System Time & Date:• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the

“RESET” (black) button is lit.• Press the “PRIVACY” (red) button.• Enter the time using the first row of selector keys (add a leading “0” if necessary):

Press two digits for the hour, press two digits for the minutes, and then press “0” fora.m., or “1” for p.m.

• The “PRIVACY” (red) button’s LED will be flashing, to indicate that the time hasbeen accepted.

• Enter the date using the first row of selector keys (add a leading “0” if necessary):Press two digits for the month, press two digits for the date, and then press twodigits for the year. The master station automatically returns to normal mode.

Reboot Entire System – This triggers a “soft reset.” It is similar to resetting the system bypowering it down (often known as a “hard reset”), but power is not removed from the system.System programming information will not be lost when this function is performed. NOTE:This function resets calls placed on the system that were not activated by a physicallylatching switch and must therefore only be performed if the system has no calls pending!

• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the “RESET”(black) button is lit.

• Press the “RESET” (black) button.

Restore Local Database – This causes the master station to obtain programming informationfrom the central equipment. This feature must only be used if the master station was used ona different system or is a new/replacement master, and needs to be updated with local systeminformation. This process is carried out automatically when a new master station is con-nected to the system and is assigned an address.

• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the “RESET” (black) button’sLED is lit.

• Press the “PAGE” (violet) button. The database upload takes up to five minutes,depending upon system size. Master station control returns automatically.

Detect System Stations – This causes the system to check for added or removed stations onthe system, after which it will reboot.

• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the“RESET” (black) button is lit.

• Press the “STAFF” (green) button.

Restore System Defaults – This causes the system to delete all previously programmedinformation and return to default settings. This also causes the system to look for new orremoved system hardware. The system will then reboot. NOTE: This process must be per-formed with caution, because the deleted information cannot be restored and will need to beprogrammed again!

• Press the “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the “RESET”(black) button is lit.

• Press the “ZONE” (blue) button.

Configuration andProgramming usingNC306 Master Stationscontinued

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 55: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 43Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Programming the system for radio pocket pagers and remote station features requires a PCrunning terminal emulation software (such as HyperTerminal, included with Microsoft® Win-dows®).

• Plug a standard null modem cable between the serial port on the back of the NC306master station and the serial port on the PC.

• Set up the terminal emulator for no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 19200 baud.• Press the NC306 “TALK” (gray) button for 7–10 seconds, until the LED on the

“RESET” (black) button is lit.• Press the NC306 “PRIORITY” (yellow) button.• The PC monitor will display the following menu:

PG – PAGER SETUPPS – PROGRAM STATIONLP – LEAVE PROGRAMMING (returns the NC306 master station to

normal operation)PL – SET POINT LIMITS

• Other keys that are used:ENTER – stores changes (if any) made to current option and moves to the

next option, or exits in pager setup functions./ (slash) – returns to the main menu during program station functions.. (period) – switches from the current point being programmed to the next

(higher) select point, and also dumps any changes made to thecurrent point.

Radio Pager Programming – The radio pager programming options are, in order: PagerNumber Assignments, Zone Assignments and Call Type Assignments.

• Type PG ENTER. The display will show all the pager numbers (0 through 47) and theirassociated pager cap codes.

• Type the pager number (0–47) to be programmed, and press ENTER. The display willshow the cap code currently assigned to that pager number. Type a new3-digit cap code, and press ENTER.

• Type the zone letters (A–P) assigned to this pager, separated by commas, and pressENTER.

• Type the letters of call types to be sent to this pager, separated by commas, andpress ENTER. Valid call types are shown on the display. They are:

A – Code F – Cord Out J – Personal AttnB – Fire G – Priority K – RoutineC – Emergency H – Duty L – Stat RequestD – Monitor I – Staff M – Staff RequestE – Bath

• Type # (pound) and press ENTER to save the settings for this pager.

Station Programming – By default, stations are assigned to the NC306 selector buttonsbeginning with the lowest physical address on the lowest numbered port. The stations areassigned to the selector buttons sequentially, starting with the top button in the left row(selector button 0), continuing down each row in sequence, and ending with the bottombutton in the right row (selector button 49). After all 50 selector buttons have been assignedto stations, any additional stations are ignored—unless an NC255 Master Station Expanderis used to add 50 more selector buttons to the NC306 (adding selector buttons 50 through99).

The Program Station function allows the selector button assignments to be changed fromthe defaults, so that a particular selector button can be associated with any station on anyport.

Programming Pagers andRemote Stations with theNC306 Master Station

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 56: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

44 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

The station programming options are, in order: Assign Station to Selector Button, Station ID,Bed Numbers, Station Labels Single/Dual Patient Stations, Audio Page On/Off, Online/Offline,Privacy, Call Priority and Station Zones. (The last four functions can also be programmedusing the NC306 master’s keypad.)

• Type PS ENTER. The display will show “POINT (0–99).”• Type the number (0–99) of the selector button to be programmed, and press

ENTER. The LED on that selector button will start flashing, and the display will showthe physical address of the port and station assigned to that selector button.

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType the physical address of the port and station physical address to be assignedto this selector button, and press ENTER. (Example: “07,15 ENTER” assigns the sta-tion on port 7 with dipswitch setting 15 to this selector button.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType the 4-character alphanumeric room ID to be assigned to the station associatedwith this selector button, and press ENTER. (Station IDs are used by event printing,pagers and NC304/LCD masters.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType the bed number(s) to be assigned to the station, and press ENTER. (Example:“R,L ENTER” changes the bed1 and bed2 extensions of a dual station to R and L. Theextensions are used by event printing, pagers and NC304/LCD masters.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType a 1–16 character alphanumeric label for bed1, and press ENTER. (Alphanumericlabels are displayed on NC304/LCD masters with VGA display monitors.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType a 1–16 character alphanumeric label for bed2, and press ENTER.

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType N and then press ENTER to turn Station Paging Off, orType Y and then press ENTER to turn Station Paging On. (When station paging ison, the station will receive audio pages.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType N and then press ENTER to take the Station Offline, orType Y and then press ENTER to put the Station Online. (Take a station offline whenit must be switched off or physically removed from the system.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType N and then press ENTER to set Station Privacy off, orType Y and then press ENTER to set Station Privacy on. (When station privacy is on,the master station cannot receive audio from the patient station unless the patientstation initiates the call. The patient station will still be able to hear audio from themaster station.)

• Press ENTER to skip to next option, orType 0, and then press ENTER to set Station Priority to Routine, orType 1, and then press ENTER to set Station Priority to Personal Attention, orType 2, and then press ENTER to set Station Priority to Priority.

• Press ENTER to skip to the end, orType the zone letters (A–P) assigned to this station, or press 0 (zero) to assign nozones to this station, and press ENTER.

• To save changes, press # (pound) and then ENTER, orTo discard changes, just press ENTER .

Programming Pagers andRemote Stations with theNC306 Master Stationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 57: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 45Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NC306 seriesSoftware ComponentUpgrades

Part 1 – System Operation, Configuration and ProgrammingSystem Configuration and Programming

Set Point Limits – Use this function to assign a specific port and ID number to the firstselector key on the master station. The master station will then sequentially assign theremaining selector keys to the next 50 valid remote stations (100 stations when using aNC255 Master Expander).

• Type PL ENTER. Type Y or N to indicate presence of an NC255 Master Expander.• Type the port number and address of the station to be assigned to the first selector

key. (Type 1,00 to return the master station’s button assignments to default.)• Perform the Detect System Stations function (press “TALK” until the “RESET”

LED is lit. Then press “STAFF.”). This sequentially assigns the remaining keys toincreasingly higher port/addresses.

PLEASE READ THIS ENTIRE SECTION PRIOR TO UPGRADING ANY SOFTWARECOMPONENTS!!! See Page 33 for NC304 series & NC351(A) series Software ComponentUpgrades.

• Turn off the Central Equipment (NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2) connected to the NC306 masterstation that is to be upgraded. Disconnect the NC306 master station and bring it to theCentral Equipment. Then plug the NC306 directly into the Central Equipment to facilitateprogramming and to ensure that the programming voltage is at the correct level.

• Open the NC306 chassis by removing 5 screws. The tool used to remove these is aRobinson or Scrulox #0 screwdriver, TekTone® part number HT004. NOTE: One screwis concealed by the sliding tray.

• Move the jumper near the dipswitch to the programming position (see Figure 22a).

• On the NC306, move dipswitch number 6 to the ON position (closed).

• Turn on the Central Equipment.

• Connect a standard serial cable from the laptop computer to the serial port on theNC306 Master Station. NOTE: The laptop computer must be running on batterypower, and must not be connected to 120 VAC power.

• Copy send.exe and 387_0x.bin to the desktop of the laptop computer (where x is thefile’s version number, for example: 387_03.bin).

• On the laptop, open a DOS or COMMAND window. This should bring you to theC:\WINDOWS directory.

• On the laptop, type cd desktop and press the ENTER key. This will move you into theC:\WINDOWS\DESKTOP directory, where the files are located.

• On the NC306, move dipswitch number 7 to the ON position and then back to the OFFposition.

• On the laptop, type send 387_0x.bin (where x is the file’s version number, for example:send 387_03.bin) and press the ENTER key.

• As packets are sent, information will be displayed on the laptop’s screen. There will be4095 packets sent.

• Turn off the Central Equipment. Disconnect the serial cable between the laptop and theNC306.

• Place the programming jumper back in its original position, and move dipswitch number6 back to the OFF position.

• Reassemble the NC306 Master Station, restore it to its original location, and reconnectit. Then, turn on the Central Equipment.

Programming Pagers andRemote Stations with theNC306 Master Stationcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 58: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

46 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Step 1: Read the following information prior to installing the Tek-CARE® NC300™II sys-tem equipment. The installer must be familiar with the system and its installationrequirements and guidelines.

Step 2: Determine equipment locations.

Step 3: Install system wiring.

Step 4: Install housings.

Step 5: Use ohmmeter to check for shorts and grounds in system wiring. NOTE: This isa critical and necessary step for avoiding installation problems later. Whenchecking for shorts between shields, remember that the provided interconnectioncable harnesses already have the shields connected together internally as a prepa-ration to their introduction to the central equipment’s ground.

Step 6: Set patient, staff and duty station addresses. Refer to Figure 23 in the EquipmentConfiguration and Settings section.

Step 7: Power up the equipment. When prompted, enter the Master ID at each NC304and NC304LCD master station. Then at master station (ID #1), perform the Re-store System Defaults function. When the system has returned to normal opera-tion, it will be ready for use and programming. Refer to the SystemConfiguration and Programming section for more information on thesefunctions.

Step 8: Connect equipment to system wiring. SEE TROUBLESHOOTING INFOR-MATION BELOW!

Step 9: Verify connections.

Step 10: Perform full operational test of the system, including all peripheral devices.

Step 11: Read System Configuration and Programming section and configure system.

Step 12: Train system operators.

TIP: Before the above process begins, consider this brief comment on troubleshooting.The transition between Step 9 and Step 10 is a very important one. It is during this phase ofthe installation process that the system is first powered up with field wiring, patient stationsand peripheral devices. This is the time when most installers encounter problems with wir-ing and equipment. To reduce troubleshooting time and prevent damage to the system com-ponents, the installer must take the following precautions:

• Do not connect the entire system together for initial power up. It is suggested thatjust the central equipment and the first master station/VGA monitor be con-nected for test. Next, the remaining master stations/VGA monitors must be con-nected one by one, until all are connected and functional. This allows the installerto establish a “known good” test point to work from, as well as immediately iden-tifying problems as they are introduced to the system.

• Do not connect all patient station runs to the central equipment at once. Con-nect individual runs to the central equipment one by one until all are connectedand functional. This allows the installer to more easily locate and recognize theintroduction of wiring or equipment problems in the field.

These procedures may appear to take longer to perform than connecting the entire systemtogether and powering it up, but following them reduces troubleshooting time markedly.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 59: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 47Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

• Do not use wire nuts for wire connections. Wire connections must be made withcompression-type connectors, rated for stranded wire, that use a ratcheting-typetool for installation.

• Do not short shields together, as this allows for noise transference from the datalines to the audio lines.

• Unused conductors from the plug-on wiring harnesses of various devices must betaped up to prevent the ends of the cut wires from coming into contact with otherpoints (circuit boards, back boxes, etc.).

• Do not exceed the maximum specified cable distances. Pay extra attention duringthe planning stages when running cable to areas that add “hidden” length to cableruns.

• The capacitance on the data wires is critical (<24 pF/ft.). If the cable capacitanceexceeds this level, data signal degradation can occur and interfere with normalsystem operation.

• Do not run system cabling in close proximity to other electrical system cables orbuilding power cables. These systems can induce noise, resulting in system opera-tional problems and/or audio noise.

Locate the Tek-CARE® NC300™II System Equipment in accordance with the followinginformation. The installation of all system equipment, cabling and enclosures must be inaccordance with the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70-1999), the Healthcare Fa-cilities Code (ANSI/NFPA 99-1999), and all applicable state and local codes.

NC351(A) and NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment (CE): The microprocessor-basedNC351(A) is the core piece of equipment for the Tek-CARE® NC300™II Nurse Call Sys-tem. All master stations and patient stations connect to it; patient stations and NC306 mas-ter stations receive their power from the central equipment, while NC304 and NC304LCDmaster stations operate from local +12 VDC power supplies. The standard NC351(A) willsupport 4 master stations (1 per port) and 256 patient stations (64 per port). The NC351(A)/2 will support 8 master stations and 512 patient stations, and includes the necessary addi-tional connection ports. NOTE: This configuration also requires the external PK305/Asupplemental power supply. The NC351(A) and NC351(A)/2 central equipment caneach power a maximum of 4 NC306 masters, or 3 NC306 masters with NC255 masterstation expanders. Any remaining system ports can be filled with NC304 andNC304LCD stations, if desired. Both CE versions also include 2 isolated serial outputs forexternal applications (such as Tek-PAGING®, event printing and Tek-MMARS®II). All masterand patient station ports are protected by self-resetting current-limiting circuits. Optionalbattery backup is provided using TekTone® PK250-series.

The NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 includes a standard 3-prong connector and cable, and must belocated near a dedicated 115 VAC outlet connected to the Emergency Branch of the facility’sEssential Electrical System (i.e., connected to a backup power source), suitable for computer-grade equipment. To minimize wiring distances, the device must be centrally located to themaster and patient stations. The NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 must be shelf or desk mounted inan area with a consistent temperature of approximately 26°C and relative humidity not ex-ceeding 80%. If a PK250-series battery backup is used, locate it in the same area. A PK305/ASupplemental Power Supply is required with the NC351(A)/2 (as indicated above). Locatethe PK305/A near a dedicated 115 VAC outlet connected to the facility’s Emergency PowerCircuit (i.e., connected to a backup power source), suitable for computer-grade equipment,and within 2' of the NC351(A)/2. Interconnect the NC351(A)/2 and PK305/A using the pro-vided interconnection cable (CT305). The PK305/A must always be powered down when thecentral equipment is powered down. Do not stack equipment on top of the NC351(A),

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locations

Problems to Avoid

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 60: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

48 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NC351(A)/2 or PK305/A. Do not locate these devices near other electrical systems, suchas fire alarm panels, electrical motors, air conditioning equipment, etc.

PK304 Master Station Power Supply: The PK304 provides +12 VDC power to the NC304 orNC304LCD Master Station. It connects directly to the master station, and requires a dedi-cated 115 VAC wall outlet connected to the facility’s Emergency Power Circuit (i.e., con-nected to a backup power source), suitable for computer-grade equipment (see NC304,NC304LCD and NC306 Master Station).

NC304, NC304LCD and NC306 Master Station: The NC304, NC304LCD or NC306Master Station is used by the facility staff to interface with, configure and program thenurse call system via the function buttons and numeric keypad. It provides call indicationon individual selector LEDs (NC306), a 2-line LCD display (NC304LCD), or works inconjunction with an NC313 VGA monitor (NC304 and NC304LCD) to display any or allsystem activity. The staff may answer calls via the loudspeaker (controlled by the “TALK”button) or by using the handset for calls that require more privacy.

The NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 is typically located on a desk or countertop, within easyreach of the facility staff. The NC304 and NC304LCD master stations must belocated within 6' of a dedicated 115 VAC outlet connected to the Emergency Branch of thefacility’s Essential Electrical System (i.e., connected to a backup power source), suitable forcomputer-grade equipment. (See PK304 Master Station Power Supply.) The master stationmust also be within 6' of the included pre-wired wall plate, and it comes with a DB9 connectorand cable for interconnection. The pre-wired wall plate mounts on a single-gang ring or box,and must be within 1000' of the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment. The operat-ing environment for the master station is approximately 26°C and relative humidity notexceeding 80%. See wiring installation section for additional details. After all connections tothe master station have been made, please use the included ty-wrap to secure all connectedcables together for strain relief purposes. Battery backup is provided using TekTone® PK250-series. If a PK250-series is used, locate it in the same area.

NC315 LCD/NC313 VGA Monitor: The NC315/NC313 is used in conjunction with theNC304 or NC304LCD to display any or all system activity in standard English format. The15" monitor displays up to 22 events simultaneously. This display is also required for sys-tem configuration and programming in conjunction with the master station. The NC315/NC313 includes standard on/off, brightness and contrast controls, and a power indicator.

The NC315/NC313 is typically located on a desk or countertop, within easy viewing range ofthe facility staff. The monitor must be within 6' of the NC304 or NC304LCD Master Station,and includes a DB15 connector and cable for interconnection. The monitor includes a stan-dard 3-prong connector and cable, and must be within 6' of a standard 115 VAC computer-grade wall outlet. The operating environment for the NC315/NC313 is approximately 26°Cand relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See Wiring Installation section for further details.

IR3xx-series Stations—General Information: All of the IR3xx-series devices’ electronicsare mounted on a flame-retardant ABS plastic panel. Nylon mounting screws are providedwith all IR3xx-series stations to ensure compliance to the latest UL® 1069 requirements,which now include ESD testing. Users must observe ESD precautions when handling thesedevices as they may be damaged if improperly handled. Each of the IR3xx-series stationsrequire a unique address, which is set using the on-board dipswitch (refer to EquipmentConfiguration and Settings section). Plug-on connectors are provided for easy installation.

The IR3xx-series stations use the Steel City H3BD backbox with a 3GC plaster ring. Refer toFigure 19 for mounting. The minimum dimensions for the backbox must be not less than 8.6"× 4.5" × 2.5", and the minimum clearance from current carrying parts to dead metal parts mustbe no less than 0.5". These devices are typically located for convenience, mostcommonly at the head of the patient’s bed, unless specified otherwise. The IR3xx-series

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 61: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 49Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

stations must be located within 1000' feet of the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2, and so thatfurniture, curtains and other features do not interfere with audio communication. See Wir-ing Diagrams section for additional requirements. NOTE: There are additional guidelinesfor station location in the wiring installation section. The operating environment for theIR3xx-series stations is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See Wiring In-stallation section for additional information.

IR300-series Multipurpose Station: The IR300-series Multipurpose Station serves as anaddress point for stand-alone peripheral device applications. It has no external controls, butdoes have additional control connections brought out to an additional header (refer toFigure 38—6 & 7-PIN Connector Outputs for IR3xx-series Stations). Activate a specialfeature on the IR300-series station (only) by turning on dipswitch 7 to allow the device tooperate its dome lamp outputs as zone lamps for zone annunciation.

The IR300-series must be located central to the various peripheral devices that are con-nected to it. See IR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details.

Figure 19 – Mounting IR Series Stations

IR019C Remote Speaker/Microphone Station: The IR019C is used in conjunction withthe IR300-series station to provide a ceiling mounted or remotely mounted speaker/micro-phone. The IR019C is located where needed and mounts on a standard two-gang ring orbackbox. The device must be located within 50' of the associated IR300-series station. Theoperating environment for the IR019C is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%.

IR301-series Single, IR302-series Dual Patient Stations: The IR301-series and IR302-seriesprovide reliable hands-free communication between the patient and facility staff. The IR301-series and IR302-series use standard 0.25" phone jacks for call cord connection—one for theIR301-series and two for the IR302-series. Call cord presence is supervised, and the systemprovides an indication when a cord has been removed and not replaced. The patient stationshave indicators for call placement assurance and in-use status. A reset button is also providedto reset calls locally. See IR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details.

SF380-series Single Patient Stations: The SF380-series stations generate routine, cord-outand bath call placement signals in the same manner as the IR301-series, but they mount onsingle-gang boxes. The stations accommodate either code and fire signals (SF380C); a nursepresence signal (SF380P); or bath, code and fire signals (SF380A); but do not handle aidepresence or monitor signals. Note: SF380-series stations must be programmed for Per-sonal Attn. Priority Level.

IR311-series Single, IR312-series Dual Patient Stations: The IR311-series andIR312-series are identical to the IR301-series and IR302-series, with the exception of the jacktype and added pillow speaker function control lines. The jacks are 8P8C type—one for theIR311-series and two for the IR312-series. Additional headers are provided for specific pillowspeaker-only connections—one for the IR311-series and two for the IR312-series (refer toFigure 38—6 & 7-PIN Connector Outputs for IR3xx-series Stations). These stations caninterface with the PM311C/PM312C Intercom Modules and the PM321B/PM322B LampControl Modules. See IR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 62: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

50 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

IR319-series Single, IR320-series Dual Patient Stations: The IR319-series and IR320-series are identical to the IR301-series and IR302-series, with the exception of the jack typeand added pillow speaker function control lines. The jacks are DIN type—one for the IR319-series and two for the IR320-series. Additional headers are provided for specific pillowspeaker-only connections—one for the IR319-series and two for the IR320-series (refer toFigure 38—6 & 7-PIN Connector Outputs for IR3xx-series Stations). These stations caninterface with the PM311C/PM312C Intercom Modules and the PM321B/PM322B LampControl Modules. See IR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details.

PM311C/PM312C Pillow Speaker Intercom Modules: The PM311C (for IR311-series or IR319-series) and PM312C (for IR312-series or IR320-series) modules connect to the patient stationand allow the nurse call system audio to be redirected from the patient station to the pillowspeaker connected to it. SF301PI series, SF301DIG, SF401DIG or SF41-series pillow speakersare required for this application. If the connected call cord or pillow speaker does not supportthis function, the audio reverts back to the patient station. The modules plug directly onto theback of patient stations and are subject to the same environmental requirements.

PM321B/PM322B Light Control Modules: The PM321B (for IR311-series or IR319-series)and PM322B (for IR312-series or IR320-series) modules allow SF301PL series, SF301DIG,SF401DIG or SF41-series pillow speakers to activate control relays that can be linked via drycontacts to control overhead and table lighting. The control relays are brought out on aseparate header. (Refer to Figure 36—PM321B/PM322B Lamp Module Wiring Diagram.)WARNING: Connect only Class 2, Power Limited circuits (in accordance with ANSI/NFPA70, ANSI/NFPA 99 and ANSI/UL® 1069) to the PM321B or PM322B. If in doubt, contact thefactory. The modules plug directly onto the back of patient stations and are subject to thesame environmental requirements.

RY350B Multi-Channel Relay: The RY350B provides for the selection of entertainmentprogram sources by the patient, via TekTone® pillow speakers with radio button (“R” series,SF301DIG or SF401DIG) in conjunction with IR311-series, IR319-series, IR312-series or IR320-series patient stations. (IR312-series and IR320-series stations require two RY350B relays.)The device has six circuit positions and allows 4 radio channel inputs (the remaining twochannels are reserved for the “off” position and the TV audio source). The RY350B electron-ics are mounted on a flame retardant ABS plastic panel. It uses the same housings as theIR3xx-series stations. The RY350B requires a separate +12 VDC power source (1.2 Watt perdevice). Locate the RY350B within 25' of the associated patient station, with access to thefacility’s radio audio cable lines. The environment for the RY350B is 10-40°C with relativehumidity not exceeding 80%. Refer to Figure 35—RY350B Wiring Diagram for specificconnection information. Refer to IR3xx-series Station—General Information for housinginformation.

RY351B Hill-Rom® SideCom® Adapter: The RY351B provides an interface for the Hill-Rom®

SideCom® bed to the IR311-series, IR319-series, IR312-series (requires two RY351B) andIR320-series (requires two RY351B) patient stations. This enables the intercom, call place-ment indication, and in-use indication functions of the SideCom® bed to work with the nursecall system. The SideCom®’s lamp and lighting controls are connected to the lighting controlsystem and do not need to interface with the nurse call system. The RY351B interface alsodetects the disconnection of the (low voltage) signaling cable from the wall receptacle andplaces a noncancellable call to the programmed nursing Master Station. The RY351B elec-tronics are mounted on an aluminum bracket that can be used to mount the device on a SteelCity two-gang backbox, part number 52171-1/2 and 3/4 with 52-C-13 single gang adapter ring.The RY351B must be within 6' of the patient station to which it is connected. The Hill-Rom®

P376 series plug-in adapter must be installed within 10' of the RY351B. The operating envi-ronment for the RY351B is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 63: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 51Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

IR310-series Staff Station: The IR310-series provides a communication point for staff mem-bers to call the master station for staff to staff communication. The device also has a specialfeature that is activated by turning on dipswitch 7. This feature allows the device to call inas a patient station for applications in which call cords are not desired for patient call in. Acall button, reset button, call-placed indicator and in-use status indicator are provided. SeeIR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details.

IR315-series Duty Station: The IR315-series is similar to the IR310-series, but provides theextra feature of call annunciation and zone lamp operation. The IR315-series has no dipswitch7 features. It is designed to provide additional points of annunciation for the nurse callsystem in locations that are not within sight or hearing of the master station. A call button,reset button, call-placed indicator, in-use status indicator and emergency indicator are pro-vided. See IR3xx-series Station—General Information for additional details. The IR315-series does not support code call devices.

Call Cords:SF301 Push button call cord, 7' (for IR301-series, IR302-series)SF301/10 Same as SF301, but with 10' cordSF301DIG Pillow speaker, 8' cord, intercom & controls for lights, TV and radio

(for IR311-series with PM311C, PM321 and RY350B;IR312-series with PM312C, PM322B and two RY350B)

SF301P Series Pillow speaker with 7' cord (for IR311-series, IR312-series)SF301PI Series Pillow speaker with intercom, 7' cord

(for IR311-series with PM311C; IR312-series with PM312C)SF302 Dual push button call cord, 7' (for IR301-series, IR302-series)SF302/10 Same as SF302, but with 10' cordSF311 Push button call cord for 8P8C jack (for IR311-series, IR312-series)SF312 Dual push button call cord for 8P8C jack (for IR311-series, IR312-series)SF401 Push button call cord, 7' (for IR319-series, IR320-series)SF401DIG Pillow speaker, 8' cord, intercom & controls for lights, TV and radio

(for IR311-series with PM311C, PM321 and RY350B;IR312-series with PM312C, PM322B and two RY350B)

SF401P Series Pillow speaker with 7' cord (for IR319-series, IR320-series)SF41-series Pillow speaker, 8' cord, intercom & controls for lights and TV

(for IR311-series with PM311C, PM321; IR312-series with PM312C, PM322B)

NOTE: Geriatric call cords are available with 0.25" phone plug and 8P8C plug, with eithersingle and dual call buttons. Contact the factory for details.

Call cords are inserted into their associated patient stations and are subject to the sameenvironmental requirements.

Figure 20 – Mounting LI380, LI384A, LI386-series Dome/Zone Lights

LI380 Dome Light: The LI380 provides visual indication from the IR3xx-series stations andassociated peripheral devices. Four bulbs and four colored lenses allow the device to indicateall system call types with various flash rates and combinations. When connected to an IR315-

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 64: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

52 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

series Duty Station, the light functions as a zone light. The LI series dome lights use the SteelCity H2BD backbox with a 2GC plaster ring; refer to Figure 20 for mounting. The minimumdimensions for the backbox must be not less than 4"×4"×1½", and the minimum clearance fromcurrent carrying parts to dead metal parts must be no less than 0.5". The dome light must belocated above or beside the doorway of the associated room, and must be mounted so thatunobstructed visibility is provided. When being used as a zone light, the LI380 must bemounted at corridor heads or junctions so that facility staff members can readily identify theassociated zone area. The LI380 must be within 50' of the patient station it is connected to. TheLI380 requires a specific jumper connection to be made (from pin 1 of the 8-pin connector topin 6 of the 15-pin connector on the associated patient station) to disable the lamp faultdetection circuitry of the associated IR3xx-series station it is connected to (refer to Figure31—IR3xx-series Connections to Peripheral Devices). The operating environment for theLI380 is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See Wiring Installation section foradditional details.

LI384A Supervised Dome Light: The LI384A provides the same functionality as the LI380and includes supervisory circuitry to monitor the lamps. When a lamp fails, the systemindicates a lamp fault for the associated room location. The wire jumper mentioned in theLI380 information is not required. See the LI380 Dome Light information for location andenvironmental requirements.

LI386-series Dome/Zone Light: The LI386-series provides the same indication functional-ity as the LI384A and includes support electronics to make it an addressable device. Thisdevice is suitable for stand-alone equipment applications and zone indication applications.NOTE: This device does not support all of the standard peripheral devices (refer toFigure 33—LI386-series Dome/Zone Light Wiring Diagram). Turning on dipswitch 7activates the zone indication feature. See the LI380 Dome Light information for locationand environmental requirements.

Figure 21 – Mounting SF Series Stations

SF Series Peripheral Devices—General Information: The SF series peripheral devices’electronics are mounted on flame retardant ABS plastic faceplates. SF series devices mustbe mounted within 50' of the patient station to which it will be connected. They are mountedon single-gang rings or boxes; see Figure 21 (minimum ring opening not to be less than1¾" × 2¾"). Nylon mounting screws are provided with all SF series peripheral devices toensure compliance to the latest UL® 1069 requirements, which now include ESD testing.The minimum clearance from current carrying parts to dead metal parts must be no lessthan 0.5". Plug-on connectors are provided for easy installation. See Wiring Installationsection for additional details.

SF337C Bath/Emergency Switch: The SF337C allows patients to initiate a bath call toinform staff members that they require assistance in bathroom or restroom areas. The de-vice is designed to be mounted in wet areas when properly installed (using the includedgaskets for the panel and screws). The device can be activated by hand with the red pulldown lever, or by pull-cord (if installed). It also provides a call placed indicator.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 65: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 53Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This device is typically located in toilet, bath and shower areas, and is mounted at a heightconvenient for use. If the device is being mounted to a tile wall or other irregular surface, theinstaller must provide extra sealant to fill tile seam points or other gaps. If the device is beingused with pull-cord activation, the included cord must be installed through the guide tab andred pull-down lever and secured with a double knot. Mounting location and cord lengthmust be such that a prone patient can reach the call cord to activate the device. The operat-ing environment for the SF337C is 10-40°C, and the device is water resistant when correctlyinstalled. See SF series Peripheral Devices—General Information for additional details.

SF340B Emergency Switch: The SF340B provides the same operational functionality as theSF337C, except that it is not suitable for moist or wet environments. The operating environ-ment for the SF340B is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See SF seriesPeripheral Devices—General Information for additional details.

SF381 Standalone Emergency Switch: The SF381 provides the same operational functional-ity as the SF337C, except that it is not suitable for moist or wet environments. The operatingenvironment for the SF381 is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See SFseries Peripheral Devices—General Information for additional details. The SF381 differselectronically from the SF337C or SF340B devices in that it incorporates electronic circuitryto support standalone functionality similar to that of an IR3xx-series Station. Informationthat applies to this aspect of the device can be found in the first paragraph of IR3xx-seriesStations—General Information.

SF341B Supervised Code Call Station: The SF341B allows patients and staff members toinitiate high priority “CODE” calls. The device incorporates a supervisory circuit to moni-tor the wiring connection to the patient station, as well as a call placed indicator. The deviceis activated by hand operation of the blue pull-down lever. The SF341B must be located forconvenient operation in areas that require code call initiation (such as ICU/CCU areas). Theenvironment for the SF341B is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See SFseries Peripheral Devices—General Information for additional details.

SF382 Standalone Code Call Station: The SF382 provides the same operational function-ality as the SF341B. The operating environment for the SF382 is 10-40°C with relativehumidity not exceeding 80%. See SF series Peripheral Devices—General Informationfor additional details. The SF382 differs electronically from the SF341B device in that itincorporates electronic circuitry to support standalone functionality similar to that of anIR3xx-series Station. Information that applies to this aspect of the device can be found in thefirst paragraph of IR3xx-series Stations—General Information.

SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station: The SF350B works in conjunction with the nurse/aidepresence registration features of the nurse call system. It allows nurse and aide staff to registertheir presence with a simple button push, and facilitates the transfer of nurse follower featuresfrom room to room (when activated at the master station). A nurse registration button andindicator, and an aide registration button and indicator are provided. The SF350B must belocated for staff convenience, typically within the associated room near its entrance. Theenvironment for the SF350B is 10-40°C with relative humidity not exceeding 80%. See SFseries Peripheral Devices—General Information for additional details.

SF250 Staff Presence Station: The SF250 functions in the same manner as the nurse por-tion of the SF350B. This device is labeled “Staff” instead of “Nurse,” and has the samelocation and environmental requirements as the SF350B. See SF series Peripheral De-vices—General Information for additional details.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Descriptions,Requirements and Locationscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 66: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

54 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

The bulk of the necessary wiring information can be found in the Wiring Diagrams section atthe end of this manual. Refer to Figure 25—Tek-CARE® NC300™II Block Wiring Diagramfor additional cable specifications. Below is a list of important wiring installation items critical toa successful installation, and a list of problems to avoid.

The NC351(A) and NC351(A)/2 include master station ports, patient station ports and serialports. Interconnection cable harnesses (also known as “whip” or “pigtail” connectors) areprovided for the master station ports (with each master station) and for the patient stationports (4 for NC351(A) and 8 for NC351(A)/2 are provided with the central equipment). For theserial ports, a single serial cable, configured for the NC365A Radio Paging System (as indi-cated in Figure 39—NC351(A) Serial Connection Diagram), is included. Each port type isseparately described below, with the specifics of connection.

Each Master Station Port supports one master station and a maximum of 1000' of intercon-necting cable (refer to Figure 25—Tek-CARE® NC300™II Block Wiring Diagram, Figure26—Tek-CARE® NC300™II System Connection Diagram, and Figure 27—NC304/NC306Block Wiring Diagram). Master stations must be home run to the central equipment. Thisis the wiring specification for the interconnecting cable:

Data Wires: #18 AWG, 1 twisted pair (8 twists per ft.) plus 1 conductor (3 conduc-tors, 7 str. BC) with 100% aluminum/mylar shield and #20 AWG TCdrain wire. Nominal insulation 0.017", nominal OD 0.245" and capaci-tance <24pF/ft. Recommended conductor colors are ORANGE, YEL-LOW and GREEN. Overall jacket.

Power Wires: #18 AWG, 3 conductors (7 str. BC) with 100% aluminum/mylar shieldand #20 AWG TC drain wire. Nominal insulation 0.009" and nomi-nal OD 0.175". Recommended conductor colors are BROWN, REDand BLUE. Overall jacket.

Audio Wires: #18 AWG, 1 twisted pair (8 twists per foot, 2 conductors, 7 str. BC)with 100% aluminum/mylar #20 AWG TC drain wire. Nominal in-sulation 0.017", nominal OD 0.235" and capacitance <24 pF/ft. Rec-ommended conductor colors are VIOLET and GRAY. Overall jacket.

Ground Wire: #16 AWG, 1 conductor (26 str. BC) with nominal OD 0.101". Rec-ommended color is BLACK.

Each Patient Station Port supports up to 64 patient stations and a maximum of 1000' feetof interconnecting cable. This maximum distance does not include peripheral wiring con-nections, and only reflects the common wiring between all of the stations on that particularport and their associated connection to the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment.The common wiring used is the same type as specified above for the master station connec-tion. The following must be observed for patient station wiring:

• Each cable run must have no more than 16 patient stations, each with a 4-bulbdome lamp. Multiple runs to a single port are allowed, as long as the total1000' maximum cable run per port is not exceeded. For example, if 64 sta-tions, each having a 4-bulb dome lamp, are placed on a single port, there mustbe a minimum of 4 runs, and the total cable length of all the runs on the portmust not exceed 1000'.

• Cable runs may have up to 32 stations if no dome lamps are used or if singleor dual bulb dome lamps are used.

• Do not run cables to the bottom of the patient station backboxes, becausethere is no access for cable passage.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Wiring Installation

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 67: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 55Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Wiring Installationcontinued

• At all splice points, the common cable shields must be kept isolated from allother circuits and fed through as any other conductor would be. The shieldsmust be continuous through the entire run and must be isolated and tapedback at the end of the run. When connecting the common cable to the centralequipment, the shields will be connected to the shields of the interconnectingwire harness (also known as “whip” or “pigtail” connector).

• Each patient station port has one audio path. If a system is known to have asmall quantity of stations that will occupy only one or two ports, the installershould consider redistributing the devices evenly among all of the availablestation ports. This enables all of the available audio paths for use in systemoperation, allowing four or eight (depending on the central equipment used)simultaneous paths, and increasing call response efficiency.

Each isolated Serial Port provides an RS232 output (8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit)at 9600 baud. Various connection configurations are shown on Figure 39—NC351(A)Serial Connection Diagram. Standard #22 AWG, 4 conductor cable will support all indi-cated applications. Devices connected to these outputs must be within 100' of the NC351(A)or NC351(A)/2.

NC304 and NC304LCD Master Station: The device addresses are configured throughsoftware. Please see the System Configuration and Programming section in Part 1 ofthis manual for set up information. Internal adjustment controls are provided for field ad-justment of Audio In (clockwise to adjust louder), Tone Level (clockwise to adjust louder),and Audio Out (counterclockwise to adjust louder), if the site has specific needs that re-quire changes from the factory settings. The Audio Out control must never be set to lessthan the half position. If the master audio is too loud at the patient station, refer to Figure40—NC351(A)/2 Internal Hardware Diagram for additional controls to adjust. A resetswitch is present and is located on the bottom of the master station and is accessible by oneof the openings there. It is a momentary microswitch that can be pressed by any smallnonmetallic tool. Pressing this switch will reset the master station. Refer to Figure 22 forphysical locations of adjustment potentiometers.

Figure 22 – NC304 and NC304LCD Potentiometer Functions

Equipment Configurationand Settings

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 68: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

56 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NC306 Master Station: The device address is configured via dipswitches on the back of themaster. Refer to Figure 22a for switch settings. Internal adjustment controls are provided forfield adjustment of Audio In (clockwise to adjust louder), Tone Level (counterclockwise toadjust louder), and Audio Out (counterclockwise to adjust louder), if the site has specificneeds that require changes from the factory settings. The Audio Out control must never beset to less than the half position. If the master audio is too loud at the patient station, refer toFigure 40—NC351(A)/2 Internal Hardware Diagram for additional controls to adjust. Areset switch is located on the back of the master station. Toggling this switch will reset themaster station. Refer to Figure 22b for locations of adjustment potentiometers.

A maximum of four NC306 Masters or three NC306 Masters with NC255 Expanders can beconnected to the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment.

NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment: These devices are entirely configured throughsoftware. NOTE: the installer must perform Restore System Defaults from the System Func-tions menu prior to performing any kind or system configuration or programming (refer toSystem Operating Instructions for details).

Normal

Program

1234567

ON

1 = address value 12 = address value 23 = address value 44 = address value 8

5 = default master 6 = program firmware7 = reset

Jumper

Firmware

Dipswitches

Switch “ON” (down) Value

Figure 22a – NC306 Dipswitches and Jumper Settings

Audio in - AdjustClockwise for louder

Tone Level - AdjustCounter-Clockwise for louder

Audio Out - AdjustCounter-Clockwise for louder

Dipswitches Jumpers

Figure 22b – NC306 Potentiometer Functions

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Configurationand Settingscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 69: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 57Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Configurationand Settingscontinued

IR3xx-series Stations: These devices are addressed by turning on and off the 7 availabledipswitches located on each device. Stations that occupy the same port must all have uniqueaddresses (ranging from 00 to 63). The 7-switch dipswitch uses a binary configuration method(1 has a value of 1, 2 a value of 2, 3 a value of 4, 4 a value of 8, etc.). Using these values, thestation address is represented by the sum of the values of all switches that are turned on. Forexample, if switches 2 (value 2) and 5 (value 16) are turned on, the address is 18 (2+16=18).Using this method, values of 00 to 63 can be generated using only switches 1 through 6. Thisleaves dipswitch 7 free for special features as described in the Equipment Descriptions, Re-quirements and Location section. See Figure 23 for reference.

Figure 23 – IR3xx-series Stations Dipswitch Location and Switch Values

The system uses this information and the port that a station is plugged into to create itsdefault station number. The default station number consists of four digits. The first digit is0 and is assigned by the software. The next digit is the port that the device is plugged into(ranging from 1 to 8). The final two digits are the station address, based on the dipswitchsetting on the actual device. For example, a station with a dipswitch address value of 18(from the previous example) that is plugged into station port 4 of the central equipment hasan address of: 0418 (0 is assigned, port 4, dipswitch value of 18).

IR315-series Duty Station: In addition to the dipswitch address settings, the IR315-seriesalso has a tone control adjustment (via three pin header) to set annunciation tone levels.Refer to Figure 24 for header settings.

Figure 24 – IR315-series Duty Station Layout

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 70: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

58 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Installation

Equipment Configurationand Settingscontinued

SF380A Single Patient Station:Refer to Figure 47—SF380A Wiring Diagram for dipswitch settings. Note: SF380-seriesstations must be programmed for Personal Attn. Priority Level.

SF380C Single Patient Station:Refer to Figure 43—SF380C Connections to Peripheral Devices for dipswitch settings.Note: SF380-series stations must be programmed for Personal Attn. Priority Level.

SF380P Single Patient Station:Refer to Figure 44—SF380P Connections to Peripheral Devices for dipswitch settings.Note: SF380-series stations must be programmed for Personal Attn. Priority Level.

SF381 Standalone Bath Station/SF382 Standalone Code Station: Refer to Figure 45—SF381/SF382 Wiring Diagram for dipswitch and jumper (shunt) settings.

PM352 Station Port Card:Refer to Figure 42—PM352 and PM354 Jumper Settings for jumper settings.

PM353 Processor Card:There are two sets of dipswitches on this card. During normal usage, these switches shouldnot need to be changed from the factory settings. Refer to Figure 40—NC351(A)/2 Inter-nal Hardware Diagram. The dipswitch functions are as follows:

Vertical Dipswitch:1 – Reset Polling Processor.2 – Normally off. If turned on during a power up, the system will perform the

Detect System Stations menu function (see System Configuration and Pro-gramming section).

3 – Normally off. If turned on, enables Bed Out call for test purposes.4 – Off, no function.5 – Normally off.6 – Off, no function.7 – Off, no function.

Horizontal Dipswitch:1 – Reset Central Processor.2 – Normally off. If turned on during a power up, the system will perform the

Restore System Defaults menu function (see System Configuration andProgramming section).

3 – Normally off. Turn on if NC364A Telephone Interface is connected to thesystem.

4 – Normally off. If turned on before booting, it allows the system to run with nomasters. Operation will be slower, and masters will be detected as they areconnected.

5 – Normally off. Turn on to support Versus® system.6 – Off, do not change.7 – Off, do not change.

PM354 Master Port Card:Refer to Figure 42—PM352 and PM354 Jumper Settings for jumper settings.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 71: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 59Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This section provides guidelines for testing the Tek-CARE® NC300™II system. As mentionedpreviously, we recommend that the installer connect and test the system in sections, to allowfor easier identification of problem locations. Before testing a system, perform a completewalk through of the facility, and be certain to:

• verify that all components of the system to be tested are completely installed.• verify that all patient stations that require them have call cords attached.• verify that all pull cord or hand pull stations are in the “Reset” position.

Using the System Operating Instructions section for reference, activate and observe thesystem operation for every component connected to the system. While initial testing mustbe performed in sections, a complete system test must be performed once all componentsare connected to the system. This entails activating every system component and verifyingits operation a final time before considering the installation complete.

We recommend that the system be periodically tested as indicated in the System Test In-structions to verify that the system is in good operating condition. If problems are encoun-tered, contact qualified service personnel for system repair or maintenance. The next sec-tion, System Maintenance Instructions, indicates which items may be serviced by on-sitemaintenance personnel.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Test Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 72: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

60 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Maintenance Instructions

NOTE: Certain maintenance and upgrade operations require the nurse call system to bedeactivated. Facility staff must be notified before system deactivation and given an estimatedlength of time that the system will be off.

NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station: The handset must be replaced if a prob-lem is encountered. To do so, perform the following steps:

• To remove the handset from the cord, depress the modular jack’s locking tab andpull the cord away from the handset. This should occur easily if the locking tab isproperly depressed.

• Insert the cord into a new handset. Gently pull on the cord to ensure that the lock-ing tab is engaged and the cord does not pull out.

• Test the new handset by placing a call to a patient station, using the handset forcommunication (refer to System Operating Instructions for details).

The handset cord may also be replaced if a problem is encountered. To do so, perform thefollowing steps:

• To remove the handset from the cord, depress the modular jack’s locking tab andpull the cord away from the handset. This should occur easily if the locking tab isproperly depressed.

• To remove the cord from the master station base, depress the modular jack’s lock-ing tab and then pull cord away from the master station base. This should occureasily if the locking tab is properly depressed.

• Insert the new cord into the handset. Gently pull on the cord to ensure that thelocking tab is engaged and the cord does not pull out.

• Insert the new cord into the master station base. Gently pull on the cord to ensurethat the locking tab is engaged and the cord does not pull out.

NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2: The FZ011 fuse (4A, 250 VAC – 0.25" × 1.25") in the powerentry module may be replaced. Refer to drawing 3001 for power entry module location.

• Turn off the central equipment and disconnect the 115 VAC power plug. WARN-ING: Failure to disconnect the 115 VAC power prior to replacing the fusecould result in a dangerous shock!

• Using a small slotted screwdriver, remove the fuse plate from the power entrymodule.

• Remove the old fuse from the holder and insert a new fuse.• Reinsert the fuse plate into the power entry module.• Reconnect power to the central equipment.

IR301-series, IR302-series, IR319-series, IR320-series or SF380-series Patient Station:Call cords may be replaced if a problem is encountered. To do so perform the following steps:

• To remove the call cord, firmly grip the plug and pull straight away from thepatient station.

• To insert the new call cord, hold the plug and push the end straight into the callcord jack on the patient station.

• Test the cord by pressing the button on the other end. This should initiate a call andlight the call indicator. Press the reset button on the patient station to reset the call.Observe the station for 10 seconds to ensure that no “cord-out” call occurs.

IR311-series or IR312-series Patient Station: Call cords and/or pillow speakers may bereplaced if a problem is encountered. To do so perform the following steps:

• To remove the call cord or pillow speaker, firmly grip the plug and depress thelocking tab. Pull straight away from the patient station.

• To insert the new call cord or pillow speaker, hold the plug and push the endstraight onto the call cord jack on the patient station.

• Test the call cord or pillow speaker, respectively, by depressing the button on theother end or the red nurse call button. This should initiate a call and light the call

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 73: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 61Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

indicator. Press the reset button on the patient station to reset the call. Observe thestation for 10 seconds to ensure that a “cord-out” call does not occur.

LI380, LI384A and LI386-series Dome/Zone Lights: Lamp bulbs must be replaced if theyno longer light. To do so, perform the following steps:

• Remove the light cover lens by gripping it firmly, squeezing the sides and pulling itstraight off the base plate.

• Remove the bulb by grasping the glass portion gently, so as not to break it. Pushinwards, rotate it counterclockwise, and pull it straight away from the metal socket.

• If a color bulb cover is used, remove and transfer it to the new bulb.• Hold the new bulb by the glass portion gently, so as not to break it. Push it straight

into the new socket and rotate it clockwise.• Replace the cover lens.• Test the lamps by triggering the appropriate call to illuminate the new bulb (refer

to the System Operation Instructions for details).

PK305/A Supplemental Power Supply Upgrade: NOTE: This component must only beadded if the system is being upgraded with a PM352 Station Port Card (see PM352 StationPort Card Upgrade section). This component is always used with the NC351(A)/2 Cen-tral Equipment, which includes two PM352 cards as a standard feature.

• Connect power interconnect cable, provided with the PK305/A unit, to thePK305/A and the NC351(A) (refer to Figure 40—NC351(A)/2 Internal Hard-ware Diagram for connection points).

• Connect the provided 120 VAC power cord to the PK305/A and plug into a120 VAC outlet.

• Turn the PK305/A on. This device must always be powered down when thecentral equipment is powered down.

PM352 Station Port Card Upgrade: TekTone® recommends unit be sent to factory forPM352 upgrade. TekTone® assumes no responsibility for damage caused by improperconnections made in the field. NOTE: This component requires that a PK305/A Supple-mental Power Supply be connected to the central equipment device. This upgrade allowsthe central equipment to support an additional 256 patient stations. Configure the jumperson the card properly as shown in Figure 42—PM352 and PM354 Jumper Settings.

• Turn off the NC351(A) Central Equipment.• Remove 4 screws and remove the central equipment chassis cover.• Refer to Figure 40—NC351(A)/2 Internal Hardware Diagram for card loca-

tion and orientation.• Remove two cover plates and retain mounting bolts.• Refer to Figure 41—NC351(A)/2 Expanded System Exploded Internal Wir-

ing Diagram for proper connection of CT351 and CT367s.• Insert card into appropriate motherboard slot. Verify that card is seated properly.• Use mounting bolts to secure card brackets to the central equipment chassis.• Install PK305/A as described above in PK305/A Supplemental Power Supply

Upgrade.• Reinstall central equipment cover.• Power up the system and use existing field port cable connections to verify that

card is operating normally, prior to connecting unverified field port cables.

PM354 Master Port Card Upgrade: TekTone® recommends unit be sent to factory forPM354 upgrade. TekTone® assumes no responsibility for damage caused by improperconnections made in the field. NOTE: This component requires that a PK305/A Supplemen-tal Power Supply be connected to the central equipment device. This upgrade enables thecentral equipment to support an additional 4 master stations. Configure the jumpers on thecard properly as shown in Figure 42—PM352 and PM354 Jumper Settings.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Maintenance Instructions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 74: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

62 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Maintenance Instructions

• Turn off the NC351(A) Central Equipment.• Remove 4 screws and remove the central equipment chassis cover.• Refer to Figure 40—NC351(A)/2 Internal Hardware Diagram for card location

and orientation.• Remove two cover plates and retain mounting bolts.• Refer to Figure 41—NC351(A)/2 Expanded System Exploded Internal Wir-

ing Diagram for proper connection of CT351, CT354s and CT370s.• Insert card into appropriate motherboard slot. Verify that card is seated properly.• Use mounting bolts to secure card brackets to the central equipment chassis.• Install PK305/A as described above in PK305/A Supplemental Power Supply

Upgrade.• Reinstall central equipment cover.• Power up the system and connect new master stations to additional ports. It is

recommended that the new master stations be connected locally to the central equip-ment first to verify the card’s operation prior to connecting new field cable runsand installing masters at their respective remote locations.

Replacement Part Numbers:Part # Description Used byCA033 Handset Cord NC304 or NC304LCD Master StationFZ011 4A 250 VAC – 0.25"×1.25" NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 CELI028 28v lamp LI380, LI384A, LI386-series Dome/Zone lightsSF301 Call Cord – 7' IR301-series, IR302-series StationsSF302 Dual Call Cord – 7' IR301-series, IR302-series StationsSF301/10 Call Cord – 10' IR301-series, IR302-series StationsSF302/10 Dual Call Cord – 10' IR301-series, IR302-series StationsSF301DIG Pillow Speaker (intercom, IR311-series, IR312-series Stations

TV, radio and lights)SF301P Pillow Speaker IR311-series, IR312-series StationsSF301PIR Pillow Speaker (intercom IR311-series, IR312-series Stations

and radio features)SF311 Call Cord – 7' IR311-series, IR312-series StationsSF312 Dual Call Cord – 7' IR311-series, IR312-series StationsSF311/10 Call Cord – 10' IR311-series, IR312-series StationsSF401 Call Cord – 7' IR319-series, IR320-series StationsSF401DIG Pillow Speaker (intercom, IR319-series, IR320-series Stations

TV, radio and lights)SF41-series Pillow Speaker (intercom, IR319-series, IR320-series Stations

TV and lights)SF401P Pillow Speaker IR319-series, IR320-series StationsSF401P2L Pillow Speaker IR319-series, IR320-series StationsTA030 Handset NC304 or NC304LCD Master Station

Upgrade Part Numbers:Part # Description Used byPK305/A Supplemental Power Supply NC351(A)*PM352 Station Port Card NC351(A)*PM354 Master Port Card NC351(A)*

Contact Factory for software upgrade information and refer to the Keyboard Functionssection of Part 1, System Configuration and Programming.

*NC351(A)/2 already includes two PM352 and PM354 cards. NC351(A)/2 always requiresPK305/A.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 75: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 63Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

This section provides guidelines for troubleshooting the Tek-CARE® NC300™II system. Itcovers general troubleshooting practices, as well as specific suggestions for various prob-lems.

As mentioned in the System Installation section of this manual, there are some generaltroubleshooting techniques that installation personnel must follow during the installationof the system equipment. NOTE: Installers must always exercise care when trouble-shooting problems that might involve high current or high voltage damage. Installersmust also exercise extreme caution and be aware of equipment or wiring that uses orhandles high voltage, as these sources are potentially lethal.

Do not connect the entire system together for the initial power up. Connect only the centralequipment and the first master station/VGA monitor for testing. Then connect the re-maining master stations/VGA monitors one at a time until all are connected and functional.This allows the installer to establish a “known good” test point to work from, and to imme-diately identify problems as they are introduced to the system.

Do not connect all patient station runs to the central equipment at one time. Connectindividual runs to the central equipment one by one until all are connected and functional.This allows the installer to more easily locate and recognize the introduction of wiring orequipment problems in the field.

Direct Connection is a classic troubleshooting technique. If a problem is encountered, aninstaller may directly connect a master station or a patient station to the central equipment.If the problem ceases, then the source of trouble is located in the field (i.e., wiring or mount-ing related problems), whereas if the problem remains, it is equipment based. This can alsobe applied to patient station peripheral devices, which can be directly connected at thepatient station location. While this is not an absolute test, it can provide a strong indicationof where to look when troubleshooting.

Swap Testing is another well-known method of problem identification. If a problem isidentified, an installer can interchange a known good piece of equipment into the locationin question and move the device having problems to the location that the known gooddevice previously occupied. NOTE: If a device or wiring indicates high current or highvoltage damage, this technique must be delayed until the source of the original prob-lem is located. When swap testing is performed, the system must be powered downduring the actual swapping process or damage may result. “Hot-swapping” is highlydiscouraged. As an example, a patient station in one room that demonstrates a problem canbe “swapped” with a station from another room that is known to be working acceptably. Ifthe symptom follows the original problem device, the problem is equipment based. If theproblem remains in the original location, a field problem is indicated (i.e., wiring or mount-ing related problems). This technique can be applied to master stations, master station con-trol equipment, central equipment ports, etc.

The Tek-CARE® NC300™II also provides diagnostic menu functions to assist in trouble-shooting. The Extended Printing function is very useful for tracking master menu activitywhen troubleshooting. The Diagnostics menu also provides several functions for trouble-shooting. Refer to the System Configuration and Programming section for details.

Connect a computer or laptop running MS Windows® HyperTerminal directly to the centralequipment’s central event printing port, and connect an NC306 or NC304LCD master directlyto the central equipment.With this setup, specifics on fault conditions and system activityare displayed on the computer screen in real time, making initial setup and troubleshootingeasier.

System Event Logging

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 76: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

64 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Components Required• A personal or laptop computer with a serial port• A terminal emulator program capable of logging text received via the serial port to a

file.• A standard DB9 null modem or crossover cable

Using a Generic Terminal Emulator Program• Connect the computer serial port to the PM454 event logging port.• Configure the terminal emulator for 9600 bits per second, 8 bit data, 1 stop bit and no

parity. If flow control settings exist, set to no flow control.• Connect, if the program requires it.• Generate some system events to test the connection.• Configure the terminal emulator to log events to a file.

Using Microsoft® HyperTerminal:• Connect the computer serial port to the PM454 event logging port.• Start HyperTerminal (Start | All Programs | Accessories | Communications |

HyperTerminal).• Throughout this procedure, disregard or cancel all warnings and requests for dial-

ing information, since this information is not required to log system events.• Type a name for the connection, choose an icon to represent it, and click OK.• Select the desired COM port to in the Connect using: drop-down box, and click OK.• Set the port settings as follows: Bits per second: 9600, Data bits: 8, Parity: none,

Stop bits: 1, Flow control: none, and click OK. (If not automatically prompted for portsettings, access them as follows: Verify that HyperTerminal indicates Disconnectedin the lower left corner. Choose File | Properties, and click on CONFIGURE.)

• If HyperTerminal indicates Disconnected in the lower left corner, choose Call | Callto connect.

• Generate some system events to test the connection.• To configure HyperTerminal to log events to a file, choose Transfer | Capture Text.

Browse to or type a name for the desired text file, and click the START button.

The following readings can be taken using a standard voltage meter. All readings are takenusing the system ground as a reference. NOTE: All readings below are approximations andmust be used only as rough guidelines. This is due to the variables created by each job site,such as wire lengths, number of stations, etc.

Master Station Connections: Taken with the master station connected at the wall plate orcentral equipment.

Wire Color Description Voltage ReadingGray Audio A +5.5 to 6.5 VDCYellow 485B 0 to +5 VDC fluctuationOrange 485A 0 to +5 VDC fluctuationBlue VOX 0 or +11 VDC (dependent on VOX circuit state)Green Ground 0 VDCViolet Audio B +5.5 to 6.5 VDCBrown Not usedRed +12 VDC +10.5 to 12 VDC @ wall jack (dependent on

wire run length)Shields Ground 0 VDC

Patient Station Connections: Refer to Figure 30—Connector Circuit Interconnections forAddressable Stations, Figure 31—IR3xx-series Connections to Peripheral Devices, andFigure 32—IR3xx-series Connections with Supervised Dome Light.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Voltage Readings

System Event Loggingcontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 77: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 65Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Common Connector:Wire Color Description Voltage ReadingGray Audio - The levels on this line can vary, but must not

be a constant +12 or +24 VDC.Violet Audio + The levels on this line can vary, but must not

be a constant +12 or +24 VDC.Blue +12 VDC +11 to 12 VDC.Green Data Common 0 VDC.Yellow Data Out See information below.Orange Data In See information below.Red Negative 0 VDC.Brown +24 VDC +24 VDC.

Yellow Data Out—To calculate the average voltage for this line, subtract the total num-ber of patient stations connected to a port from 132. Divide the result by 126, thenmultiply by 12. For example, 10 patient stations would be: ((132 – 10) ÷ 126) × 12 =11.62 VDC.

Yellow wire’s average voltage level (VDC) = ((132 – P) ÷ 126) × 12 VDCwhere P = the number of patient stations on the port.

Orange Data In—To calculate the average voltage for this line, add 186 to the totalnumber of patient stations connected to a port. Divide the result by 442, then multiplyby 12. For example, 10 patient stations would be: ((10 +186) ÷ 442) × 12 = 5.32 VDC.

Orange wire’s average voltage level (VDC) = ((P + 186) ÷ 442) × 12 VDCwhere P = the number of patient stations on the port.

These formulas produce more accurate results if the nominal 12 VDC reading value isused instead of 12 VDC. Take the nominal 12 VDC reading from the Blue wire, usingthe Red wire as a reference. This number is also an approximation and may vary slightlyfrom field tolerances.

Note: During CE power up stages, the data lines can be in standby or unknown states.This could result in a reading of approximately 12 VDC. Take readings for the yellow andorange wires when the system is in a running state after boot up is complete.

Peripheral Connector:Wire Color Description Voltage Reading/Test SuggestionYellow/White Aide Input 0 VDC / Momentary application of +12 VDC

will toggle call status.Green/White Nurse Input 0 VDC / Momentary application of +12 VDC

will toggle call status.Orange/White Bath Input 0 VDC / Constant application of +12 VDC will

initiate bath call.Red/White Emergency Input 0 VDC / Constant application of +12 VDC will

initiate emergency call.Brown/White Monitor Input 0 VDC / Momentary application of +12 VDC

will initiate a Monitor call that is reset bypressing the reset button on the station.NOTE: A fire call can be triggered by apply-ing a constant +12 VDC to both Red/Whiteand Brown White at the same time.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Voltage Readingscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 78: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

66 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Wire Color Description Voltage Reading/Test SuggestionBlack Code A Call active: +9 to 10 VDC. Call inactive: +12

VDC. This input works in conjunction withCode B. When this input is active, a tricklecurrent runs constantly through the wires andcode station with an approximate load of 47,000ohms. Shorting these lines together will trig-ger a code call manually.

White Code B Call active: +7 to 8 VDC. Call inactive: +1 to2 VDC. / See Black (Code A) information.

Gray Negative 0 VDC.Violet +12 VDC +11 to 12 VDC.Blue Lamp Fault This input must receive a constant +24 VDC

input, or a lamp fault will be triggered.Green Red Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off and 0 to +1 VDC

when lamp is on.Yellow Green Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off and 0 to +1 VDC

when lamp is on.Orange Yellow Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off and 0 to +1 VDC

when lamp is on.Red White Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off and 0 to +1 VDC

when lamp is on.Brown Peripheral LED Output +1 to 2 VDC when no calls are active. A con-

stant pulsing to +12 VDC when a bath oremergency call is placed.

Standalone Bath and Code Station Connections: Refer to Figure 45—SF381/SF382 Wir-ing Diagram.

Common Connector:Wire Color Description Voltage ReadingGray Red Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off; 0 to +1 when

lamp is on.Violet White Dome Output +24 VDC when lamp is off; 0 to +1 when

lamp is on.Blue +12 VDC +11 to 12 VDC.Green Data Common 0 VDC.Yellow Data Out +8 to 11 VDC.Orange Data In +4 to 6 VDC.Red Negative 0 VDC.Brown +24 VDC +24 VDC.

Voltage Readingscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 79: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 67Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Code Fault Indication (SF341B)• Confirm that the station actually has a code device connected to it.• If a code station is present, then verify the trickle current loop path. Disconnect the

Code A and Code B lines from the peripheral connector on the back of the patientstation. Using an ohmmeter, read across the two lines for the loop resistance (ap-proximately 47,000 ohms). Wiring continuity must also be verified.

• The code station and associated patient station can be swap tested with other“known-good” devices.

Comm. Fault Indication (patient station fault)• Determine if the comm. fault is singular or a large group of patient stations. (If using

NC306 Master Station, press the “ZONE” button twice to have master stationindicate which points are in fault.)

• If the faults are a large group, then the associated common wiring to that section ofrooms must be examined for opens, shorts and grounds. The actual architecturalroom numbers can assist in the physical location. If the faults represent all of thestations on the patient station port, then the port may no longer be working. Swaptesting between ports can be performed. The installer will need to perform theDetect System Stations command from the System Functions menu (see SystemConfiguration and Programming for details). Once the problem has been iden-tified, corrected, and the ports returned to their original configuration, the DetectSystem Stations command will need to be executed again.

• If the fault is a single device, verify the local room wiring (connections and plug-on connector) for continuity, opens, shorts and grounds. The patient station mayalso be swap tested with another “known-good” device for verification.

Data or Polling Noise• Verify that common cable shield drain wires have been kept isolated and fed through

at splice points. At the end of a cable run, the shields must be isolated and tapedback. Noise transference is a cumulative effect and is worsened for each error inconnection. NOTE: The included connection harness (“pigtail” or “whip” con-nector) brings the shields together prior to entering the central equipment chassis.Thus, if an ohmmeter is used to check for continuity between shields, the connec-tion harness must be removed prior to taking the reading.

IR019C has no audio communications• Measure the speaker coil resistance with an ohmmeter. It must read approximately

45 ohms.• Directly connect the IR019C to the associated IR300-series Multipurpose Station

and verify function (refer to Figure 38—6 & 7-PIN Connector Outputs for IR3xx-series Stations). If it begins to operate, the interconnecting wire should be suspect.If it does not, then swap test the IR300-series station.

IR3xx-series Patient Station is not placing calls• Swap test the associated call cord.• Swap test the patient station with another “known-good” patient station.• If the problem encompasses an entire port, see Comm. Fault Indication section

of System Troubleshooting Guide for port swapping information.

IR3xx-series Patient Station has a constant “Cord Out” message• Verify that the call cord is properly inserted.• Swap test the call cord with another “known-good” call cord.• Swap test the patient station with another “known-good” patient station.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Symptoms and Suggestions

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 80: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

68 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

IR3xx-series Patient Station that has been installed is not recognized by the system• The installer will need to perform the Detect System Stations command from the

System Functions menu (see System Configuration and Programming for de-tails).

IR310-series Staff Station is placing “Routine Calls”• The IR310-series station has a special “routine call” feature that is triggered by

turning on dipswitch 7. If this feature is not desired, the dipswitch must be turnedoff. NOTE: This will effectively change the station’s address (triggering a comm.fault), so the Detect System Stations command must be run from the SystemFunctions menu as per the System Configuration and Programming section tocomplete the change process.

IR315-series Duty Station or LI386-series Dome/Zone Lamp is not annunciating calls• This is a software-controlled feature and is described in the System Configura-

tion and Programming section. The duty station or dome zone lamp must havethe same zones active as the zones that are to be annunciated by the device.

POLLING PROCESSOR FAIL indication• This indicates that there has been a processor failure on the PM353 module within

the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment.• Reset the central equipment.• Power down the system and re-seat all of the internal modules.

Lamp Fault Indication• Determine the type of lamp being used with the station reporting the lamp fault

(supervised or unsupervised).• If the lamp is supervised, check the four bulbs for open filaments. This can also be

verified by swap testing the bulbs with “known-good” bulbs. If all four bulbs areintact, verify the connection to the Lamp Fault Input (blue wire on the 15-pinperipheral connector on the associated patient station). During normal operation,the supervised dome lamp provides a steady +24 VDC input to prevent the lampfault from being triggered. This ceases when a filament opens.

• If the lamp is unsupervised, check the connection from the Lamp Fault Input tothe +24 VDC common wire. If this connection is present, verify its continuity. Ifthe voltage is present, swap test the patient station with a “known-good” device.

LI380-series Lamp is not lighting• Verify that the bulb filaments are not broken or open. This can also be verified by

swap testing the bulb in question with a “known-good” lamp bulb.• If the bulbs are functional, verify the connections to the patient station. The dome

lamp may also be tested by directly connecting it to the patient station peripheralconnector.

• The patient station may also be swap tested. Observe station circuit board for signsof high current damage.

MASTER FAILURE(S) indication• Observe the number displayed with this message. This number represents the

address of the master that is no longer communicating with the central equipment.This also represents the port that the master must be plugged into.

• Swap test the master station with another “known-good” master station. NOTE:Master stations are addressable—be sure correct address is set.

• Connect the master station directly to the CE.• Verify master to central equipment connections.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Symptoms and Suggestionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 81: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 69Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station has no audio communications to all patientstations

• Check master station addressing and verify that the master is plugged into thecorrect port at the central equipment (i.e., the master that is addressed as 1 must beplugged into master port 1).

NC304 or NC304LCD Master Station is making a squealing noise and has erraticLED activity

• Make sure handset is hung up and hookswitch is depressed.• Check to see if the master station’s reset switch (switch #4 on the 4-position

dipswitch) is ON. This is normally a factory setting and is not changed in the field.The normal operating position for this switch is OFF.

NC304, NC304LCD or NC306 Master Station is not displaying calls or is nothandling calls as intended

• Perform Restore Local Database command from the System Functions menu(see System Operation section of this manual).

• Review programmed settings and data to verify information, especially masterand station zone information (see System Operation section of this manual).

NC304LCD or NC313 Monitor is displaying incorrect call data• Perform Restore Local Database command from the System Functions menu

(see System Operation section of this manual).• Review programmed settings and data to verify information (see System Opera-

tion section of this manual).

NC306 Talk LED continues to flash after CE has booted (CE LED flashing)This indicates one of these two states:• The system has not detected the presence of patient stations.• The NC306 master station is not receiving a “master map”communication from

the NC351(A) series CE. This may indicate a connection problem between themaster station and the CE. Connect the NC306 master station directly to the CE forfurther direct testing.

NC315/NC313 Monitor is not displaying VGA signal• Verify that the monitor is turned on.• Verify that the VGA monitor is connected to a live 115 VAC computer grade out-

let.• Verify that the VGA cable from the monitor is plugged into the NC304 Master

Station VGA Port.

NC315/NC313 Monitor power indicator is amber• This indicator turns from green to amber when there is no video signal in. Check the

video signal source and connections.

NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment makes a loud buzzing noise shortly afterpower up (internal relay is chattering)

• Power NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 down.• Check for +12 VDC line in the field wiring for a ground short.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Symptoms and Suggestionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 82: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

70 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Pillow Speaker Intercom is not working and audio is coming from the patient station• Verify that the pillow speaker is an SF301PI series, SF401PI series, SF401P2L,

SF301DIG, SF401DIG or SF41-series device.• Verify that the pillow speaker is properly inserted into the associated 8P8C or DIN

jack. Also check the pins inside the jack for signs of bending that might prevent allconnections from being made.

• Try the pillow speaker in another room that is known to be working correctly.• Remove the patient station from the wall and verify that a PM311C or PM312C (for

IR311-series, IR312-series, IR319-series or IR320-series) has been installed on thepatient station. If a PM311C or PM312C module is present, verify the seating of themodule and the plug-on connector seating.

• Swap test the PM311C or PM312C module with a “known-good” module.• Swap test the patient station with another “known-good” patient station.

CENTRAL PROCESSOR FAIL indication at a single master locationNOTE: If the indication is system-wide, review POLLING PROCESSOR FAIL indi-cation troubleshooting suggestions

• Turn the NC351(A) or NC351(A)/2 Central Equipment off and then back on andwait for the system to reboot.

• If the message returns, check 485A and 485B lines to the associated NC304 orNC304LCD Master Station. Refer to the Voltage Readings section.

• Also check the other connections from the central equipment to the master station.

SF337C or SF340B Bath Stations not placing calls• Swap test the device with another “known-good” device. If the device works cor-

rectly in another location, examine the interconnection wiring. If it does not work,the device is suspected bad and must be replaced or repaired.

• To verify the device, review these 3 connections: brown wire—LED drive fromthe patient station, red wire—signal line to the patient station’s Bath Input, andorange wire—+12 VDC in from the patient station. When the device is operated,the +12 VDC from the orange wire is connected to the red wire to trigger the BathInput on the patient station. This in turn activates the LED output on the patientstation, which applies ground to the LED circuit, causing it to light via the brownwire.

• If the bath station and wiring appear to be correct, then the patient station can alsobe swap tested with another “known-good” patient station.

SF341B Code Station is not placing calls• See Code Fault Indication for troubleshooting advice.

SF381 Standalone Bath Station or SF382 Standalone Code Station is not placing callsThese devices look like peripheral devices, but they function electronically just like IR3xx-series Patient Stations. They interact directly with the central equipment, rather than throughan IR3xx-series Patient Station. Therefore, refer to these troubleshooting sections:

• Comm. Fault Indication (patient station fault)• IR3xx-series Patient Station is not placing calls• IR3xx-series Patient Station that has been installed is not recognized by the sys-

tem

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

Symptoms and Suggestionscontinued

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 83: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 71Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

SF350B Nurse/Aide Presence Station is not registering or is not working correctly• If the device is operating, but the LEDs are not lighting, check to see if the green or

yellow dome lamps are working. If both are out, swap test the patient station andexamine the peripheral connector’s continuity.

• If only the lights are not working and the dome outputs are working, verify thatthere is roughly +12 VDC across the orange and yellow wires at the SF350B device’slocation. Verify the continuity of the red and green wires back to the peripheralconnector on the patient station.

• If the device is not operating, the inputs on the patient station can be manuallytriggered by the application of the +12 VDC line (refer to Voltage Readings inthis section for more details). The device can be directly connected for testing, andmay also be swap tested with another “known-good” device for verification.

SF250 Staff Presence Station is not registering or is not working correctly• If the device is operating, but the LED is not lighting, check to see if the green dome

lamp is working. If the LED and lamp are both out, swap test the patient station andexamine the peripheral connector’s continuity.

• Verify that there is roughly +12 VDC across the purple and gray wires. Verify thecontinuity of the three wires going to the SF250.

• If the device is not operating, the input on the patient station can be manuallytriggered by the application of the +12 VDC line (refer to Voltage Readings in thissection for more details). The device can be directly connected for testing, and mayalso be swap tested with another “known-good” device for verification.

Symptoms and Suggestionscontinued

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingSystem Troubleshooting Guide

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 84: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

72 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Part 2 – System Installation, Maintenance and TroubleshootingEvent Printing (Sample)

03021 TESTCALL16 CHARS ROUTINE CALL 01-31 09:12

..C.............

03022 ROUTINE CALL 01-31 09:13

..C.............

03021 TESTCALL16 CHARS ROUTINE RESET 01-31 09:13

..C.............

03022 ROUTINE RESET 01-31 09:13

..C.............

03011 BATH CALL 01-31 09:13

..C.............

03011 BATH RESET 01-31 09:14

..C.............

01111 STAFF CALL 01-31 09:14

A...............

01111 STAFF RESET 01-31 09:14

A...............

02111 STAFF CALL 01-31 09:14

.B..............

02111 STAFF RESET 01-31 09:14

.B..............

Master 5 NURSE FLLW ON 01-31 09:14

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

Master 5 NURSE FLLW OFF 01-31 09:14

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 85: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 73Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Figure 17 – Menu Map

Station Information

Master Assignments

Enter Zone Box

MASTER PROGRAMMING1 Set Master ID2 Key Press Tones On/Off3 Toggle Pre-Announce Tones4 Assign Master Zones5 Assign Call Responses

Database will be transmitted

PAGER MENU

1 Pager Zone/Call Settings2 Assign Pagers to Rooms3 Local Printing Only

Toggles state when selected

2 Monitor3 Bath4 Emergency5 Code6 Fire7 Requests

Monitoring

System will reboot

Local database will be restored

Detects new or removed stations

Restores defaults

Zone Data will

Toggles state when selected

1 Staff Routine Duty

7 Enabled Extended Printing

Password Level Requirements

User Names and Passwords

Dialing Methods1. Normal Dialing2. 3 Digit Dialing3. 4 Digit Dialing

Master Information

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

4 Local Paging Only5 Central Paging/Local Prn6 Transmit Resets to Pagers

Future Expansion Function9

Displays incoming call debugging information fromstations in coded format

2

Displays software version information3

1 Set Time2 Set Date

Set Overtimes

6 Offline Data to Central

be displayed

Displays enabled dialing method5

MAIN MENU1 View System Settings2 Reconfiguration3 System Functions

6 Enable PS/2 Keyboard

4 System Diagnostics5 Execute a Custom Page

7 Initiate Locator Link8 Master Instant Messaging9 Master Call Transfer

VIEW MENUS1 View Remote Stations2 View Master Station3 View a Zone

RECONFIGURATION1 Program Master2 Program Station3 Transmit Database4 Program Pager/Print5 Set Password Levels

System Functions

1 Set Time & Date2 Enter Timeout for Overtimes3 Monitoring4 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time5 Reboot Entire System

7 Detect System Stations8 Restore System Default

1 Set Time & Date

3 Monitoring4 Toggle 12/24 Hour Time5 Reboot Entire System6 Restore Local Database7 Detect System Stations8 Restore System Defaults

Cap Code & Message Entry Box

6 Set Username/Passwd7 Enable Bedout Call8 Alternate Dialing

1 View System Masters

1

2

3

4

5

6

9 Program Roving Phone

Future Expansion Function7

Toggles state between membraneswitch on the console and the PS/2keyboard port.

2 View Station Poll Cycle3 About Software Versions

Diagnostics

8Activates Master Instant MessagingFunction

Activates Master Transfer Function9

5 Check Dialing Method

STATION PROGRAMMING1 Program Room ID2 Station On/Offline3 Station Privacy On/Off4 Station Paging On/Off5 Program Custom Label 16 Program Custom Label 27 Program Station Zones

9 Duty Station Call Response8 Station Priority

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Master Assignments

Pager Assignments

Pager Information

Minutes box1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Time Set Box (24 hour format)

Date Set Box

Toggles state when selected

Enables Normal DialingEnables 3 Digit DialingEnables 4 Digit Dialing

1

2

3

4

5

3

2

1

1

23

1

2

7

Enables Local Paging Only

Enables Central Paging with Local Printing

Enables Local Printing Only4

5

Sends data from offlineprogrammed Master Station to Central Eq.

6

Enables Reset Suppression6

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Minutes box

Programs Room ID

Sets Station On/Offline

Sets Station Privacy On/Off

Sets Station Paging On/Off

Programs Custom Label 1

Programs Custom Label 2

Programs Station's Zones

Sets Station's Priority Level

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Enter Room

Number

Sets Duty Station's Call Responses9

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 86: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

74 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 1 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8100

8101

8102

8103

8104

8105

8106

8107

8108

8109

8110

8111

8112

8113

8114

8115

8116

8117

8118

8119

8120

8121

8122

8123

8124

8125

8126

8127

8128

8129

8130

8131

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 87: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 75Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 1 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8132

8133

8134

8135

8136

8137

8138

8139

8140

8141

8142

8143

8144

8145

8146

8147

8148

8149

8150

8151

8152

8153

8154

8155

8156

8157

8158

8159

8160

8161

8162

8163

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 88: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

76 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 2 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8200

8201

8202

8203

8204

8205

8206

8207

8208

8209

8210

8211

8212

8213

8214

8215

8216

8217

8218

8219

8220

8221

8222

8223

8224

8225

8226

8227

8228

8229

8230

8231

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 89: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 77Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 2 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8232

8233

8234

8235

8236

8237

8238

8239

8240

8241

8242

8243

8244

8245

8246

8247

8248

8249

8250

8251

8252

8253

8254

8255

8256

8257

8258

8259

8260

8261

8262

8263

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 90: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

78 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 3 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8300

8301

8302

8303

8304

8305

8306

8307

8308

8309

8310

8311

8312

8313

8314

8315

8316

8317

8318

8319

8320

8321

8322

8323

8324

8325

8326

8327

8328

8329

8330

8331

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 91: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 79Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 3 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8332

8333

8334

8335

8336

8337

8338

8339

8340

8341

8342

8343

8344

8345

8346

8347

8348

8349

8350

8351

8352

8353

8354

8355

8356

8357

8358

8359

8360

8361

8362

8363

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 92: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

80 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 4 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8400

8401

8402

8403

8404

8405

8406

8407

8408

8409

8410

8411

8412

8413

8414

8415

8416

8417

8418

8419

8420

8421

8422

8423

8424

8425

8426

8427

8428

8429

8430

8431

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 93: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 81Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 4 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8432

8433

8434

8435

8436

8437

8438

8439

8440

8441

8442

8443

8444

8445

8446

8447

8448

8449

8450

8451

8452

8453

8454

8455

8456

8457

8458

8459

8460

8461

8462

8463

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 94: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

82 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 5 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8500

8501

8502

8503

8504

8505

8506

8507

8508

8509

8510

8511

8512

8513

8514

8515

8516

8517

8518

8519

8520

8521

8522

8523

8524

8525

8526

8527

8528

8529

8530

8531

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 95: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 83Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 5 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8532

8533

8534

8535

8536

8537

8538

8539

8540

8541

8542

8543

8544

8545

8546

8547

8548

8549

8550

8551

8552

8553

8554

8555

8556

8557

8558

8559

8560

8561

8562

8563

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 96: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

84 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 6 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8600

8601

8602

8603

8604

8605

8606

8607

8608

8609

8610

8611

8612

8613

8614

8615

8616

8617

8618

8619

8620

8621

8622

8623

8624

8625

8626

8627

8628

8629

8630

8631

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 97: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 85Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 6 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8632

8633

8634

8635

8636

8637

8638

8639

8640

8641

8642

8643

8644

8645

8646

8647

8648

8649

8650

8651

8652

8653

8654

8655

8656

8657

8658

8659

8660

8661

8662

8663

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 98: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

86 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 7 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8700

8701

8702

8703

8704

8705

8706

8707

8708

8709

8710

8711

8712

8713

8714

8715

8716

8717

8718

8719

8720

8721

8722

8723

8724

8725

8726

8727

8728

8729

8730

8731

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 99: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 87Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 7 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8732

8733

8734

8735

8736

8737

8738

8739

8740

8741

8742

8743

8744

8745

8746

8747

8748

8749

8750

8751

8752

8753

8754

8755

8756

8757

8758

8759

8760

8761

8762

8763

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 100: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

88 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 8 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8800

8801

8802

8803

8804

8805

8806

8807

8808

8809

8810

8811

8812

8813

8814

8815

8816

8817

8818

8819

8820

8821

8822

8823

8824

8825

8826

8827

8828

8829

8830

8831

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 101: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 89Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Port 8 Programming SheetPort + Room Online Privacy Paging Label A Label B Zones

Address Number 1 2 (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (16 characters) (16 characters) (A-P, All)

8832

8833

8834

8835

8836

8837

8838

8839

8840

8841

8842

8843

8844

8845

8846

8847

8848

8849

8850

8851

8852

8853

8854

8855

8856

8857

8858

8859

8860

8861

8862

8863

8101 2501 1 2 Y N Y MISS KAREN JONES MRS JANICE SMITH A C P

Port + Address = Hardware Port, Unit Address Paging = Set Paging on or off(Ex: for 8120, 01 = Port 1; Label = 16-character label—bed 1 & bed 220 = Address value 20) Zones = Zone(s) station is programmed for

Room Number = Architectural room number system. Zone defaults to physicalBed No. = Bed Numbers port the station is connected to.

Online = Set station online or offline (Ex: 1=A, 2=B, etc.)Privacy = Set Privacy on or off

Example of how information appears on “View Station” menu

Bed No.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 102: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

90 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

25

—Te

k-C

AR

NC

300

™II

Blo

ck

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

NC

351(

A)/2

Cen

tral P

roce

ssin

g E

quip

men

t

NC

304

STA

TIO

N

IR30

0B/C

MU

LTI-

IR30

1B/C

IR30

2B/C

DU

AL

IR31

0B/C

STA

FF

IR31

1B/C

/E

SIN

GLE

IR31

2B/C

/E

DU

AL

STA

TIO

N

IR31

5B/C

/E

DU

TY

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

6/A

/B D

OM

E/

ZON

E L

IGH

T

C+B

FO

R L

I384

AC

+B F

OR

LI3

84A

C+B

FO

R L

I384

AC

+B F

OR

LI3

84A

C+B

FO

R L

I384

A

SF

340B

/

BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

341B

CO

DE

ST

AT

ION

SF

340B

EM

ER

G.

ST

AT

ION

CA

BLE

LE

GE

ND

A=

5 C

ON

D. #

22B

= 6

CO

ND

. #22

D=

RG

59U

CO

PP

ER

BR

AID

CO

AX

IAL

CA

BLE

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

SF

350B

PR

ES

EN

CE

ST

AT

ION

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

341B

CO

DE

CA

LL

ST

AT

ION

BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

341B

CO

DE

ST

AT

ION

NO

TES

:1.

D

O N

OT

EX

CE

ED

16

STA

TIO

NS

PE

R R

UN

WH

EN

US

ING

DO

ME

LIG

HTS

,

OR

32

STA

TIO

NS

PE

R R

UN

IF N

O D

OM

E L

IGH

TS A

RE

US

ED

.

2.

EA

CH

MA

STE

R M

US

T B

E H

OM

E R

UN

TO

NC

351(

A) C

EN

TRA

L P

RO

CE

SS

ING

E

QU

IPM

EN

T (C

PE

). (1

000

FT M

AX

IMU

M)

3.

US

E #

18 G

AU

GE

WIR

E. S

EE

OTH

ER

NO

TES

FO

R D

ETA

ILS

.

4.

DO

NO

T R

UN

CO

ND

UIT

OR

WIR

E T

O B

OTT

OM

KN

OC

KO

UTS

ON

IR

SE

RIE

S S

TATI

ON

BO

X. N

O A

CC

ES

S IS

AV

AIL

AB

LE.

(4 M

AX

)

(8 w

/ EX

PA

NS

ION

)

VG

A

MO

NIT

OR

5.

UP

TO

64

STA

TIO

NS

MA

Y B

E C

ON

NE

CTE

D T

O A

SIN

GLE

PO

RT,

IF A

LL

C

AB

LE R

EQ

UIR

EM

EN

TS A

RE

ME

T. U

P T

O 2

56 S

TATI

ON

S M

AY

BE

CO

NN

EC

TED

TO

STA

ND

AR

D S

YS

TEM

. U

P T

O 5

12 S

TATI

ON

S M

AY

BE

C

ON

NE

CTE

D T

O E

XP

AN

DE

D S

YS

TEM

.

ELE

CTR

ICA

L R

ATI

NG

S (M

AX

)

6.

NC

351(

A) S

YS

TEM

SU

PP

OR

TS U

P T

O 4

NC

304

MA

STE

R S

TATI

ON

S.

NC

351(

A)/2

SY

STE

M S

UP

PO

RTS

UP

TO

8 N

C30

4 M

AS

TER

STA

TIO

NS

.

NC

313

SE

RIA

L O

UTP

UTS

IR31

9/A

/B

SIN

GLE

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

C+B

FO

R L

I384

A

IR32

0/A

/B

DU

AL

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

C+B

FO

R L

I384

A

IR31

8/IR

318A

SIN

GLE

STA

TIO

N

LI38

0 O

R L

I384

A

DO

ME

LIG

HT

SF

337C

/

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

340B

/BA

TH

ST

AT

ION

NC

351(

A) S

ER

IES

CP

E: 1

20 V

AC

, 4 A

MP

S

NC

304

MA

STE

R:

See

PK

304

info

rmat

ion

IR31

9/A

/B, I

R32

0/A

/B P

ATI

EN

T, D

UTY

, STA

FF S

TATI

ON

S:

24 V

DC

, 250

mA

SF3

37C

, SF3

39, S

F340

B, S

F341

B, S

F350

B B

ATH

, CO

DE

, E

ME

RG

EN

CY

, PR

ES

EN

CE

STA

TIO

NS

: 12

VD

C, 3

0 m

A

LI38

0/L3

84A

DO

ME

LIG

HTS

: 24

VD

C, 2

00 m

A

LI38

6/A

/B D

OM

E/Z

ON

E L

IGH

T: 2

4 V

DC

, 250

mA

SF3

01P

IR P

ILLO

W S

PE

AK

ER

: 12

VD

C, 5

0mA

PK

352

BA

TTE

RY

CH

AR

GE

R: 2

4 V

DC

, 1.2

5 A

MP

S

NC

313

VG

A M

ON

ITO

R:

120

VA

C,

.5 A

MP

S

SIN

GLE

STA

TIO

NS

TATI

ON

STA

TIO

NS

TATI

ON

STA

TIO

NS

TATI

ON

ST

AT

ION

STA

TIO

NS

TATI

ON S

F33

7C/S

F33

9M

AS

TER

SF

340B

/

SF

337C

/SF

339

SF

337C

/SF

339

ISO

LATE

D

NC

351(

A)/2

SE

RIE

S C

PE

: 120

VA

C, 4

AM

PS

PK

305/

A S

UP

PLE

ME

NTA

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY: 1

20 V

AC

, 4 A

MP

S (u

se o

nly

with

NC

351(

A)/2

)

ST

AT

ION

PK

304

Mas

ter S

tatio

n P

ower

Sup

ply:

120

VA

C, 0

.5A

PK

305/

A

Sup

plem

enta

l

Pow

er S

uppl

y

PK

305/

A to

NC

351(

A)/2

inte

rcon

nect

prov

ided

with

PK

305/

A u

nit.

NO

TE: P

leas

e re

ad th

e en

tire

Wiri

ng In

stal

latio

nse

ctio

n in

the

text

sec

tion

of th

e m

anua

l as

itpr

ovid

es a

dditi

onal

wiri

ng in

form

atio

n.

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

C=

Dat

a W

ires:

#18

AW

G, 1

twis

ted

pair

(8 tw

ists

per

ft.)

+ 1

cond

ucto

r (3

cond

ucto

rs, 7

str.

BC

) with

10

0% a

lum

inum

/myl

ar s

hiel

d an

d #2

0 A

WG

TC

dra

in w

ire. N

omin

al in

sula

tion

0.01

7",

no

min

al O

D 0

.245

" an

d ca

paci

tanc

e <2

4pF/

ft. R

ecom

men

ded

cond

ucto

r col

ors

ar

e O

RA

NG

E, Y

ELL

OW

and

GR

EE

N. O

vera

ll ja

cket

.P

ower

Wire

s: #

18 A

WG

, 3 c

ondu

ctor

s (7

str.

BC

) with

100

% a

lum

inum

/myl

ar s

hiel

d

and

#20

AW

G T

C d

rain

wire

. Nom

inal

insu

latio

n 0.

009"

and

nom

inal

O

D 0

.175

". R

ecom

men

ded

cond

ucto

r col

ors

are

BR

OW

N, R

ED

and

B

LUE

. Ove

rall

jack

et.

Aud

io W

ires:

#18

AW

G, 1

twis

ted

pair

(8 tw

ists

per

foot

, 2 c

ondu

ctor

s, 7

str.

BC

) with

100

%

alum

inum

/myl

ar #

20 A

WG

TC

dra

in w

ire. N

omin

al in

sula

tion

0.01

7", n

omin

al O

D

0.23

5" a

nd c

apac

itanc

e <2

4pF/

ft. R

ecom

men

ded

cond

ucto

r col

ors

are

VIO

LET

an

d G

RA

Y. O

vera

ll ja

cket

.G

roun

d W

ire: #

16 A

WG

, 1 c

ondu

ctor

(26

str.

BC

) with

nom

inal

OD

.101

".

Rec

omm

ende

d co

lor i

s B

LAC

K.

SF

337C

/SF

339

IR30

0B/C

, IR

301B

/C, I

R30

2B/C

, IR

310B

/C, I

R31

1B/C

/E, I

R31

2B/C

/E, I

R31

5B/C

/E,

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

Blo

ck W

iring

1 R

ev12

051

111

1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 103: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 91Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

26

—Te

k-C

AR

NC

30

0™

II S

ys

tem

Co

nn

ec

tio

n D

iag

ram

PM355

PM354

PM354

PM352

PM352

PM353

(RE

AR

VIE

W)

PO

RT

8

PO

RT

7P

OR

T 5

PO

RT

6

PO

RT

1

PO

RT

4P

OR

T 2

CA

BLE

LE

GE

ND

C=

(SA

ME

AS

"C" O

N D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

4 05

0102

1)

PO

RT

3

STA

TIO

N C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

S

STA

TIO

N C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

S

PA

GIN

GO

PE

RA

TIO

NS

EV

EN

T P

RIN

TIN

G/

MM

AR

S

(SE

RIA

L P

OR

T)

(SE

RIA

L P

OR

T)

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

NC

304

MA

STE

R 7

NC

304

MA

STE

R 5

NC

304

MA

STE

R 3

NC

304

MA

STE

R 1

NC

304

MA

STE

R 8

NC

304

MA

STE

R 6

NC

304

MA

STE

R 4

NC

304

MA

STE

R 2

NC

351(

A),

NC

351(

A)/2

CE

NO

TE:

HA

TCH

MA

RK

S A

ND

DA

SH

ED

BO

XE

S IN

DIC

ATE

OP

TIO

NA

L S

YS

TEM

CO

MP

ON

EN

TS

SE

E S

YS

TEM

OP

ER

ATI

ON

IN

STR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R P

OR

TD

EFI

NIT

ION

S A

ND

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

FUS

E P

LATE

SE

EM

AIN

T. IN

STR

.

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

NO

TE: P

leas

e re

ad th

e en

tire

Wiri

ng In

stal

latio

nse

ctio

n in

the

text

sec

tion

of th

e m

anua

l as

itpr

ovid

es a

dditi

onal

wiri

ng in

form

atio

n.

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

Blo

ck W

iring

2 R

ev4

0420

04 1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 104: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

92 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

27

—N

C3

04

/NC

30

6 B

loc

k W

irin

g D

iag

ram

PM355

PM354

PM354

PM352

PM352

PM353

(RE

AR

VIE

W)

PO

RT

8

PO

RT

7P

OR

T 5

PO

RT

6

PO

RT

1

PO

RT

4P

OR

T 2

CA

BLE

LE

GE

ND

C=

(SA

ME

AS

"C

" O

N D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

4 05

0102

1)

PO

RT

3

STA

TIO

N C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

S

STA

TIO

N C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

S

PA

GIN

GO

PE

RA

TIO

NS

EV

EN

T P

RIN

TIN

G/

MM

AR

S

(SE

RIA

L P

OR

T)

(SE

RIA

L P

OR

T)

MA

STE

RE

XP

AN

DE

RN

C25

5

NC

304

MA

STE

R 7

NC

304

MA

STE

R 5

NC

306

MA

STE

R 3

NC

306

MA

STE

R 1

NC

306

MA

STE

R 4

NC

306

MA

STE

R 2

NC

351(

A),

NC

351(

A)/2

NO

TE:

HA

TCH

MA

RK

S A

ND

DA

SH

ED

BO

XE

S IN

DIC

ATE

OP

TIO

NA

L S

YS

TEM

CO

MP

ON

EN

TS

SE

E S

YS

TEM

OP

ER

ATI

ON

IN

STR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R P

OR

TD

EFI

NIT

ION

S A

ND

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

FUS

E P

LATE

SE

EM

AIN

T. IN

STR

.

MA

STE

RE

XP

AN

DE

RN

C25

5

MA

STE

RE

XP

AN

DE

RN

C25

5

NO

TE:

Ther

e is

a li

mita

tion

of fo

ur N

C30

6 m

aste

rs

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

VG

AD

ISP

LAY

NC

313

NC

304

MA

STE

R 8

NC

304

MA

STE

R 6

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

PK

304

Pow

erS

uppl

y

NO

TE: P

leas

e re

ad th

e en

tire

Wiri

ng In

stal

latio

nse

ctio

n in

the

text

sec

tion

of th

e m

anua

l as

itpr

ovid

es a

dditi

onal

wiri

ng in

form

atio

n.

and

thre

e N

C25

5 ex

pand

ers

per s

yste

m.

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 3

Rev

2 04

2004

1

CE

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 105: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 93Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

28—

NC

351(

A)

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m U

sin

g I

nd

ivid

ual

Cab

les

NC

351(

A) C

PE

NC

351(

A) C

able

Req

uire

men

ts U

sing

Indi

vidu

al C

able

s

IR30

0/A

/B/C

/E S

ER

IES

STA

TIO

N

Max

imum

num

ber o

f sta

tions

on

any

one

cabl

e ru

n: 3

2 w

ithou

t DO

ME

LA

MP

S

Max

imum

num

ber o

f sta

tions

on

a po

rt: 6

4N

ote:

Tot

al c

ombi

ned

cabl

e le

ngth

s us

ing

#18

wire

can

not e

xcee

d 10

00 ft

.

To N

ext S

tatio

n on

Sys

tem

9 pi

n P

igta

il

1 of

4 p

orts

(8 w

/ NC

351(

A)/2

)

NO

TE: P

leas

e re

ad th

e en

tire

Wiri

ng In

stal

latio

nse

ctio

n in

the

text

sec

tion

of th

e m

anua

l as

itpr

ovid

es a

dditi

onal

wiri

ng in

form

atio

n.

Pow

er W

ires:

#18

AW

G, 3

con

duct

ors

(7 s

tr. B

C) w

ith 1

00%

alu

min

um/m

ylar

shi

eld

a

nd #

20 A

WG

TC

dra

in w

ire. N

omin

al in

sula

tion

0.00

9" a

nd n

omin

al

OD

0.1

75".

Rec

omm

ende

d co

nduc

tor c

olor

s ar

e B

RO

WN

, RE

D a

nd

BLU

E. O

vera

ll ja

cket

.

Gro

und

Wire

: #16

AW

G, 1

con

duct

or (2

6 st

r. B

C) w

ith n

omin

al O

D .1

01".

R

ecom

men

ded

colo

r is

BLA

CK

.

Dat

a W

ires:

#18

AW

G, 1

twis

ted

pair

(8 tw

ists

per

ft.)

+ 1

cond

ucto

r (3

cond

ucto

rs, 7

str.

BC

) with

10

0% a

lum

inum

/myl

ar s

hiel

d an

d #2

0 A

WG

TC

dra

in w

ire. N

omin

al in

sula

tion

0.01

7",

no

min

al O

D 0

.245

" an

d ca

paci

tanc

e <2

4pF/

ft. R

ecom

men

ded

cond

ucto

r col

ors

ar

e O

RA

NG

E, Y

ELL

OW

and

GR

EE

N. O

vera

ll ja

cket

.

Aud

io W

ires:

#18

AW

G, 1

twis

ted

pair

(8 tw

ists

per

foot

, 2 c

ondu

ctor

s, 7

str.

BC

) with

100

%

alum

inum

/myl

ar #

20 A

WG

TC

dra

in w

ire. N

omin

al in

sula

tion

0.01

7", n

omin

al O

D

0.23

5" a

nd c

apac

itanc

e <2

4pF/

ft. R

ecom

men

ded

cond

ucto

r col

ors

are

VIO

LET

an

d G

RA

Y. O

vera

ll ja

cket

.

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

Por

t Wiri

ng 1

Rev

7 10

1706

1

16 w

ith D

OM

E L

AM

PS

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 106: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

94 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

29—

NC

304,

NC

304L

CD

, N

C30

6 W

irin

g t

o C

entr

al E

qu

ipm

ent

Bro

wn

Red

Ora

nge

Yel

low

Gre

enS

hiel

d

Blu

e

Gra

yS

hiel

d

Pur

ple

Wire

Har

ness

Bro

wn

Red

Ora

nge

Yel

low

Gre

enS

hiel

d

Blu

e

Gra

yS

hiel

d

Pur

ple

Ove

rall

shie

ld

Bro

wn

Red

Ora

nge

Yel

low

Gre

enS

hiel

d

Blu

e

Gra

yS

hiel

d

Pur

ple

Bro

wn

Red

Ora

nge

Yel

low

Gre

enS

hiel

d

Blu

e

Gra

yS

hiel

d

Pur

ple

Ove

rall

shie

ld

(see

Blo

ck W

iring

Dia

gram

)&

wire

har

ness

NC

304,

NC

304L

CD

, NC

306

Cen

tral E

quip

men

t

CT3

58

Gre

en a

nd B

row

n at

the

CE

CT3

17 m

aste

r wal

l pla

teC

onne

ct J

umpe

r bet

wee

nC

T318

Cab

le "

C"

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 107: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 95Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

30

—C

on

ne

cto

r C

irc

uit

In

terc

on

ne

cti

on

s f

or

Ad

dre

ss

ab

le S

tati

on

s

AU

DIO

+

AU

DIO

-

DIG

. CO

M

DIG

. IN

DIG

. OU

T

+12

VD

C

+24

VD

C

NE

G.

SY

S G

ND

.

CU

T S

HIE

LDS

AN

D T

AP

E B

AC

KD

O N

OT

CO

NN

EC

T TO

GE

THE

R

IR30

0/A

/B/C

/E S

ER

IES

STA

TIO

N

BLACK

BLA

CK

BLA

CK

BLA

CK

(SE

E N

OTE

1)

(SE

E N

OTE

2)

8 P

INC

ON

NE

CTO

R

TO A

DD

ITIO

NA

LIR

300/

A/B

/C/E

SE

RIE

S S

TATI

ON

SA

UD

IO P

AIR

DR

AIN

WIR

ES

DA

TA T

RIP

LET

DR

AIN

WIR

ES

OV

ER

ALL

SH

IELD

DR

AIN

WIR

ES

GR

OU

ND

IN A

CC

OR

DA

NC

EW

ITH

NE

C A

RTI

CLE

250

& 5

17

CH

AS

SIS

GR

OU

ND

NO

TES

:1.

Shi

elds

mus

t be

isol

ated

from

e

ach

othe

r and

con

tinuo

us th

roug

h sp

lice

poin

t

to

the

last

sta

tion

on th

e po

rt.

2. S

hiel

ds m

ust b

e is

olat

ed fr

om

e

ach

othe

r and

from

any

gro

und.

NC

351(

A) S

ER

IES

CP

EP

OR

T C

AB

LES

1-4

(8 w

/ NC

351(

A)/2

)

SH

IELD

DR

AIN

WIR

ES

1 6 5 3 2 4 7 8 9

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

GR

EE

N

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

BLU

E

BR

OW

N

RE

D

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

GR

EE

N

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

BLU

E

BR

OW

N

RE

D

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

GR

EE

N

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

BLU

E

BR

OW

N

RE

D

RED

BROWN

BLUE

YELLOW

ORANGE

GREEN

PURPLE

GRAY

GREEN

8

7 5

3

4

6

1

2

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

Por

t Wiri

ng 2

Rev

6 10

1706

1

Not

e: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 108: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

96 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

31

—IR

3x

x-s

eri

es

Co

nn

ec

tio

ns

to

Pe

rip

he

ral

De

vic

es

P2

15 P

IN

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

BA

TH

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

MO

NIT

OR

+12

VD

C+1

2 V

DC

+12

VD

C

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NS

SF3

41B

SF3

50B

SF3

40B

STA

FF E

ME

RG

EN

CY

Mon

itor C

onta

ctN

orm

ally

Ope

n

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

E

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

PR

ES

EN

CE

STA

TIO

N

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

MO

NIT

OR

8 7 6 5 4 2 1R

ED

BR

OW

N

6 5 4 2 1

6 5 4 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1B

RO

WN

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

PU

RP

LE

GR

AY

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 115 14 13 12 11 10 9

FIR

E

16 G

AU

GE

GR

OU

ND

WIR

E

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

To N

C35

1(A

) CE

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY S

mok

e D

etec

tor

Nor

mal

ly O

pen

Opt

iona

l Met

hod

for

Sm

oke

Det

ecto

rN

ote:

Use

onl

y if

both

Em

erge

ncy

and

Mon

itor I

nput

s ar

e us

ed.

Opt

iona

l Met

hod

for

Mon

itor

Con

tact

Not

e: U

se o

nly

ifE

mer

genc

y In

put i

sno

t use

d.

IR30

0 S

erie

s S

tatio

n15

and

8 p

in c

onne

ctor

s

Con

tact

s

P1

8 P

IN

33

3

NO

TE:

IR31

5 se

ries

stat

ions

do

not s

uppo

rt C

OD

E B

LUE

Sta

tions

.

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

NO

TE

: FI

RE

IN

DIC

AT

ION

AT

TH

E N

UR

SE M

AST

ER

IS

SUPP

LE

ME

NT

AR

Y O

NL

Y.

TH

E T

EK

-CA

RE

® N

C30

0™II

SY

STE

M I

S N

OT

IN

TE

ND

ED

FO

R U

SE A

S A

FIR

E A

LA

RM

EV

AC

UA

TIO

N S

YST

EM

.

I N P U T S O U T P U T S

AID

E

NU

RS

E

BA

TH

EM

ER

MO

NIT

OR

CO

DE

A

CO

DE

B

NE

GA

TIV

E

+12

VD

C

LAM

P F

AU

LT

RE

D L

AM

P

GR

EE

N L

AM

P

YE

LLO

W L

AM

P

WH

ITE

LA

MP

LED

OU

TPU

T

-AU

DIO

+AU

DIO

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

7 6 5 4 2 13

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

37C

/SF3

39

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

SF3

40B

SF33

7C &

SF3

39 O

NL

Y!

NO

TE

: Bot

h ju

mpe

rs o

n ba

ck o

f sta

tion

nee

d to

be

in d

own

posi

tion!

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IR30

0 S

erie

s W

iring

1 R

ev10

092

710

1

SF2

50P

RE

SE

NC

E S

TATI

ON

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E6 5 4 2 13

NO

TE!:

Do

NO

T co

nnec

tS

F250

and

SF3

50B

at t

hesa

me

time.

Onl

y on

e pr

es-

ence

dev

ice

can

be c

on-

nect

ed to

a p

atie

nt s

tatio

nat

a ti

me!

Not

e: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

Lim

it 1

CO

DE

sta

tion

(SF3

41B

) per

IR-s

erie

s st

atio

n.

DO

NO

T C

ON

NE

CT

IF U

SIN

G R

Y3 5

1B

See

Blo

ck W

iring

1 fo

r spe

cific

atio

ns

(1) B

RO

WN

(2) R

ED

(3) O

RA

NG

E(4

) YE

LLO

W

(6) B

LUE

(5) G

RE

EN

GR

EE

N L

AM

P (L

I380

LED

ON

LY)

RE

D L

AM

PLA

MP

FA

ULT

OR

AN

GE

LA

MP

(LI3

80LE

D O

NLY

)W

HIT

E L

AM

P+2

4V

WIR

E C

OLO

R

FU

NC

TIO

N

LI38

0LE

D -

LI38

2LE

D(R

EA

R V

IEW

)

LI38

0

RE

D

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

WH

ITE

DO

ME

LA

MP

24V

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 109: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 97Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

32

—IR

3x

x-s

eri

es

Co

nn

ec

tio

ns

wit

h S

up

erv

ise

d D

om

e L

igh

t

P2

15 P

IN

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

BA

TH

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

MO

NIT

OR

+12

VD

C+1

2 V

DC

+12

VD

C

DO

ME

LIG

HT

LI38

4A

SF3

50B

SF3

40B

STA

FF E

ME

RG

EN

CY

MO

NIT

OR

CO

NTA

CT

NO

RM

ALL

Y O

PE

N

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

E

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

PR

ES

EN

CE

STA

TIO

N

MO

NIT

OR

8 7 6 5 4 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 2 1

6 5 4 2 1

6 5 4 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 2 1B

RO

WN

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

VIO

LET

GR

AY

8 7 6 5 4 2 115 14 13 12 11 10 9

AID

E

NU

RS

E

BA

TH

EM

ER

MO

NIT

OR

CO

DE

A

CO

DE

B

NE

GA

TIV

E

LAM

P F

AU

LT

RE

D L

AM

P

GR

EE

N L

AM

P

YE

LLO

W L

AM

P

WH

ITE

LA

MP

LED

OU

TPU

T

+12

VD

C

- AU

DIO

+ A

UD

IO

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

FIR

E

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

To N

C35

1(A

) CE

SM

OK

E D

ETE

CTO

R

NO

RM

ALL

Y O

PE

N

Opt

iona

l Met

hod

for S

mok

e D

etec

tor

Not

e: U

se o

nly

if bo

th E

mer

genc

yan

d M

onito

r Inp

uts

are

used

.

Opt

iona

l Met

hod

for M

onito

r Con

tact

Not

e: U

se o

nly

ifE

mer

genc

y In

put i

sno

t use

d.

IR30

0 S

ER

IES

STA

TIO

N15

AN

D 8

PIN

CO

NN

EC

TOR

S

P1

8 P

IN

33

33

3 3

CO

NTA

CTS

6 5 4 2 13

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NS

SF3

41B

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

40B

7 6 5 4 2 13

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

37C

/SF3

39

NO

TE

: FI

RE

IN

DIC

AT

ION

AT

TH

E N

UR

SE M

AST

ER

IS

SUPP

LE

ME

NT

AR

Y O

NL

Y.

TH

E T

EK

-CA

RE

® N

C30

0™II

SY

STE

M I

S

N

OT

IN

TE

ND

ED

FO

R U

SE A

S A

FIR

E A

LA

RM

EV

AC

UA

TIO

N S

YST

EM

.

NO

TE:

IR31

5 S

ER

IES

DO

ES

NO

T S

UP

PO

RT

CO

DE

BLU

E S

TATI

ON

S.

SF33

7C &

SF3

39 O

NL

Y!

NO

TE

: Bot

h ju

mpe

rs o

n ba

ck o

f st

atio

n

n

eed

to b

e in

dow

n po

sitio

n!

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

O U T P U T SI N P U T S

16 G

AU

GE

GR

OU

ND

WIR

E (C

ON

NE

CT

TO B

UR

NIS

HE

D S

CR

EW

PO

INT

ON

CE

NTR

AL

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CH

AS

SIS

)

#18

AW

G G

RE

EN

WIR

E O

N P

ATI

EN

T S

TATI

ON

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IR30

0 S

erie

s W

iring

2 R

ev9

0310

10 1

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

Lim

it 1

CO

DE

sta

tion

(SF3

41B

) per

IR-s

erie

s st

atio

n.D

O N

OT

CO

NN

EC

T IF

US

ING

RY

351B

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 110: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

98 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

33

—L

I38

6-s

eri

es

Do

me

/Zo

ne

Lig

ht

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

E

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

VIO

LET

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BR

OW

N

BA

TH

EM

ER

FIR

E

CO

DE

B

CO

DE

A

NE

G

+12

VD

C

NOT USED

LED

OU

TPU

T

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

SM

OK

E D

ETE

CTO

RC

ON

TAC

TSN

OR

MA

LLY

OP

EN

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

+12

VD

C

BA

TH

LI38

6 S

erie

s D

OM

E/Z

ON

E L

IGH

T

15 A

ND

8 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RS

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NS

STA

FF E

ME

RG

EN

CY

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

To N

C35

1(A

) (IL

715)

or N

C35

0C (I

L421

) Ser

ies

CE

NO

TE

: FIR

E I

ND

ICA

TIO

N A

T T

HE

NU

RSE

MA

STE

R I

S SU

PPL

EM

EN

TA

RY

ON

LY

.

T

HE

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

(IL

421)

or

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

II (

IL71

5) S

YST

EM

IS

SF3

41B

SF3

40B

SF3

40B

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

GR

AY

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

RE

D

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

RE

D

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BR

OW

N

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

RE

D

I N P U T S O U T P U T S

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

NO

T I

NT

EN

DE

D F

OR

USE

AS

A F

IRE

AL

AR

M E

VA

CU

AT

ION

SY

STE

M.

Do

NO

T co

nnec

t.

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: I

L71

5 IL

421

LI3

86 S

erie

s W

irin

g R

ev6

0411

05

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

Opt

iona

l met

hod

for s

mok

e de

tect

or.

Not

e: U

se o

nly

if E

mer

genc

y in

put

is u

sed.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 111: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 99Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

34

—R

Y3

51

B W

irin

g D

iag

ram

CA

BLE

BC

AB

LE C

CA

BLE

A

IR31

1B/C

/E I

R31

2B/C

/E I

R31

9/A

/B o

r IR

320/

A/B

PA

TIE

NT

STA

TIO

N

Not

e: U

se o

nly

wiri

ng s

uppl

ied

with

P37

6 se

ries

rece

ptac

le.

O

nly

UL

App

rove

d ho

spita

l Equ

ipm

ent s

hall

be c

onne

cted

to P

376

serie

s re

cept

acle

O

nly

Hill

-Rom

bed

s w

ith S

ideC

om n

urse

cal

l pac

kage

sha

ll be

con

nect

ed to

our

RY

351B

Hill

-Rom

Ada

pter

.

TO C

E P

OR

T C

AB

LE

VIO

LET

GR

EE

NG

RA

YR

ED

OR

AN

GE

BLU

EG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

EB

RO

WN

WH

ITE

VIO

LET

GR

EE

NG

RA

YR

ED

OR

AN

GE

BLU

EG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

EB

RO

WN

WH

ITE

GR

AY

VIO

LET

BLU

EG

RE

EN

YE

LLO

WO

RA

NG

ER

ED

BR

OW

N

-AU

DIO

+AU

DIO

+12

VD

CD

ATA

CO

M.

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E+2

4 V

DC

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

BROWN

RED

ORANGE

GREEN

VIOLET

BROWN

GREEN

BLUE

VIOLET

GRAY

BROWN

RED

ORANGE

GREEN

VIOLET

12

34

56

71

23

45

67

12

34

56

78

7 pi

n8

pin

7 pi

n

BLA

CK

BLU

EG

RE

EN

YE

LLO

WO

RA

NG

EW

HIT

EB

RO

WN

RE

D

BLA

CK

BLU

EG

RE

EN

YE

LLO

WO

RA

NG

EW

HIT

EB

RO

WN

BLA

CK

BLU

EG

RE

EN

YE

LLO

WO

RA

NG

EW

HIT

EB

RO

WN

RE

D

BLA

CK

BLU

EG

RE

EN

YE

LLO

WO

RA

NG

EW

HIT

EB

RO

WN

(35)

(8)

(22)

(4)

(7)

(26)

(9)

(25)

(35)

(8)

(22)

(4)

(7)

(26)

(9)

(25) (19)

(16)

(28)

(5)

(23)

(29)

(33)

(14)

GR

EE

NO

RA

NG

E

BLA

CK

BLU

E/B

LAC

KG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

WH

ITE

WH

ITE

/BLA

CK

BLA

CK

/WH

ITE

(19)

(16)

(28)

(5)

(23)

(29)

(33)

(14)

GR

EE

NO

RA

NG

E

BLA

CK

BLU

E/B

LAC

KG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

WH

ITE

WH

ITE

/BLA

CK

BLA

CK

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

EB

LUE

(15)

(34)

RE

D/W

HIT

EB

LUE

(15)

(34)

BLA

CK

RE

DB

RO

WN

GR

EE

NW

HIT

E

(2)

(20)

(27)

(21)

(3)

BLA

CK

RE

DB

RO

WN

GR

EE

NW

HIT

E

(2)

(20)

(27)

(21)

(3)

TO D

IRE

CT

LAM

P R

ELA

YTO

LA

MP

RE

LAY

CO

MM

ON

TO IN

DIR

EC

T LA

MP

RE

LAY

TV C

OM

MO

NTO

TV

AU

DIO

TO T

V C

HA

NN

EL

STE

PP

ER

TO D

IRE

CT

LAM

P R

ELA

YTO

LA

MP

RE

LAY

CO

MM

ON

TO IN

DIR

EC

T LA

MP

RE

LAY

TV C

OM

MO

NTO

TV

AU

DIO

TO T

V C

HA

NN

EL

STE

PP

ER

OR

AN

GE

/RE

DB

LUE

/WH

ITE

(30)

(31)

P37

6 se

ries

RE

CE

PTA

CLE

P37

6 se

ries

RE

CE

PTA

CLE

OR

AN

GE

/RE

DB

LUE

/WH

ITE

(30)

(31)

NO

T TO

BE

US

ED

Bed

Exi

t Con

nect

ions

Bed

Exi

t Con

nect

ions

NO

T TO

BE

US

ED

TO +

24V

FR

OM

CE

TO P

IN 1

ON

2N

D R

Y35

1B (i

f use

d)

Ext

erna

l Con

nect

ions

from

Hos

pita

l Gra

de T

VU

L 14

10 L

iste

d

To L

ow V

olta

ge C

ontro

l Int

erfa

ceH

ill-R

om M

odel

531

A-1

20

Or E

qual

Ext

erna

l Con

nect

ions

from

Hos

pita

l Gra

de T

VU

L 14

10 L

iste

d

To L

ow V

olta

ge C

ontro

l Int

erfa

ceH

ill-R

om M

odel

531

A-1

20

Or E

qual

RY

351B

HIL

L-R

OM

AD

AP

TER

RY

351B

HIL

L-R

OM

AD

AP

TER

S10

0S

100

S10

1S

101

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

DG

RA

YV

IOLE

TG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

EY

ELL

OW

/WH

ITE

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

DG

RA

YV

IOLE

TG

RE

EN

/WH

ITE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

EY

ELL

OW

/WH

ITE

6 7 8 9 10 4 5 3 2 1

6 7 8 9 10 4 5 3 2 1 13 11 9 8 6 5 1 2 3 4 7 10 14 12

13 11 9 8 6 5 1 2 3 4 7 10 14 12

Hos

pita

l Gra

de T

VU

L141

0H

ospi

tal G

rade

TV

UL1

410

CA

BLE

BC

AB

LE C

CA

BLE

A

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

(

Acc

epta

ble

mod

els

incl

ude

381,

382

, 383

, Affi

nity

, Tot

al C

are,

Ver

sa C

are

and

Car

e A

ssis

t.)

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

RY

351B

Wiri

ng R

ev9

0306

08 1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 112: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

100 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

35

—R

Y3

50

B W

irin

g D

iag

ram

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

TO 7

0 V

OLT

PO

WE

R A

MP

LIFI

ER

S

CH

AN

NE

L #2

CH

AN

NE

L #3

CH

AN

NE

L #4

CH

AN

NE

L #1

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E -

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E +

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

-

RE

D/W

HIT

E+

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E-

BLA

CK

+

WH

ITE

-

GR

AY

+

RE

D+

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

15 P

in

6 P

in

RY

350B

RE

LAY

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

PU

RP

LE

GR

AY

15 P

in

8 P

in

7 P

in

IR31

1B/C

/E, I

R31

9/A

/B

TOP

VIE

W

SF3

01D

IG

PIL

LOW

SP

EA

KE

R

TV C

ON

TRO

L

-AU

DIO

& S

WIT

CH

CO

MM

ON

+AU

DIO

+12

VD

C

Not

e: P

ower

sup

ply

othe

r tha

n

Nur

se C

all i

s re

quire

d.

1.2

Wat

ts p

er R

Y35

0B u

nit.

+12

VD

C P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

Not

e: T

his

shou

ld b

e du

plic

ated

for I

R31

2B/C

/E o

r IR

320/

A/B

Dua

l Pat

ient

Sta

tions

EX

TER

NA

L C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

SFR

OM

HO

SP

ITA

L G

RA

DE

TV

UL

1410

LIS

TED

OR

AN

GE

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

BR

OW

N

BR

OW

N -

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

RY

350B

Wiri

ng R

ev6

1018

06 1

Not

e: F

or re

mai

ning

con

nect

ions

see

dia

gram

s:IL

715

IR30

0B-C

Ser

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

5 03

3103

1IL

715

IR30

0B-C

Ser

Wiri

ng 2

Rev

4 03

3103

1

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

OR

SF4

01D

IG

STA

TIO

N

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 113: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 101Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

36

—P

M3

21

B/P

M3

22

B L

am

p M

od

ule

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

VIO

LET

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

GR

AY

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

TV A

UD

IO &

SW

ITC

H C

OM

MO

N

TV A

UD

IO +

(FR

OM

TV

OU

TLE

T)TV

SW

ITC

H O

UTP

UT

(CO

NN

EC

TS T

O B

RO

WN

WIT

H B

UTT

ON

DE

PR

ES

SE

D [C

OM

MO

N A

UD

IO])

RA

DIO

OU

TPU

T TO

RY

350B

NO

T U

SE

D

RO

OM

LA

MP

CO

MM

ON

RE

AD

LA

MP

RE

AD

LA

MP

CO

MM

ON

RO

OM

LA

MP

FRO

M P

ILLO

W S

PE

AK

ER

#2

FRO

M P

ILLO

W S

PE

AK

ER

#1

TO S

YS

TEM

CO

MM

ON

WIR

ES

PM

321/

PM

322

Ser

ies

LAM

PM

OD

ULE

LAM

P R

ELA

YO

UTP

UTS

TV A

UD

IO &

SW

ITC

H C

OM

MO

NTV

AU

DIO

+ (F

RO

M T

V O

UTL

ET)

TV S

WIT

CH

OU

TPU

T (C

ON

NE

CTS

TO

BR

OW

N W

ITH

BU

TTO

N D

EP

RE

SS

ED

[CO

MM

ON

AU

DIO

])

RA

DIO

OU

TPU

T TO

RY

350B

NO

T U

SE

D

8 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

R

BE

D #

17

PIN

CO

NN

EC

TOR

BE

D #

27

PIN

CO

NN

EC

TOR

NO

TE: P

M32

1B la

mp

does

not

incl

ude

top

7-pi

n m

odul

e.

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

PM

321

PM

322

Ser

ies

Con

nect

ions

Rev

2 04

1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 114: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

102 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

37

—L

I38

4A

Mu

ltip

le S

tati

on

s 12 101115 1314 4 23 189 6 57

6 58 7B

LUE

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

2 14

RE

D

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

3

12 101115 1314 4 23 189 6 57

O TU STUP

O TU STUP

N PI U ST

N PI U ST

78

IR30

0/A

/B/C

/E S

ER

IES

STA

TIO

NS

15 A

ND

8 P

IN C

ON

EC

TOR

S

78

SE

RIE

S S

TATI

ON

STO

AD

DIT

ION

AL

IR30

0/A

/B/C

/E

IR30

0/A

/B/C

/E S

ER

IES

STA

TIO

NS

15 A

ND

8 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RS

1

16 G

AU

GE

GR

OU

ND

WIR

E6 345 21

16 G

AU

GE

GR

OU

ND

WIR

E6 2345

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

TO N

C35

1(A

) CE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

EFI

RE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BR

OW

N/W

HIT

E

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

YE

LLO

W/W

HIT

E

GR

EE

N/W

HIT

E

OR

AN

GE

/WH

ITE

RE

D/W

HIT

E

FIR

E

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

BA

TH

CO

DE

A

NE

GA

TIV

E

+12

VD

C

LAM

P F

AU

LT

RE

D L

AM

P

GR

EE

N L

AM

P

YE

LLO

W L

AM

P

WH

ITE

LA

MP

LED

OU

TPU

T

-AU

DIO

+AU

DIO

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

+24

VD

CAID

E

NU

RS

E

MO

NIT

OR

EM

ER

CO

DE

B

NE

GA

TIV

E

CO

DE

A

NE

GA

TIV

E

+12

VD

C

LAM

P F

AU

LT

RE

D L

AM

P

GR

EE

N L

AM

P

YE

LLO

W L

AM

P

WH

ITE

LA

MP

LED

OU

TPU

T

-AU

DIO

+AU

DIO

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

+24

VD

CAID

E

NU

RS

E

MO

NIT

OR

EM

ER

CO

DE

B

NE

GA

TIV

E

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

LI38

4A M

ulti-

Wiri

ng R

ev6

1018

06 1

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

BA

TH

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 115: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 103Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

38—

6 &

7-P

IN C

on

nec

tor

Ou

tpu

ts f

or

IR3x

x-se

ries

Sta

tio

ns

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

NY

ELL

OW

OR

AN

GE

RE

DB

RO

WN

7 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RIR

300B

/C/E

STA

TIO

N V-o

ut

CO

RD

OU

T IN

PU

T (U

se w

/ V-o

ut)

NO

T U

SE

D

CA

LL IN

PU

T (U

se w

/ V- o

ut)

CA

NC

EL

INP

UT

(Use

w/ V

-out

)

+ A

UD

IO O

UT

- AU

DIO

OU

T

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

NY

ELL

OW

OR

AN

GE

RE

DB

RO

WN

7 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RIR

311B

/C/E

, IR

312B

/C/E

, IR

319/

A/B

, IR

320/

A/B

STA

TIO

N

CA

LL L

ED

OU

TPU

T

CO

NTR

OL

( PM

311C

/PM

312C

ON

LY)

CA

LL IN

PU

T +1

2 V

DC

RA

DIO

OU

T +1

2 V

DC

TV O

N/O

FF S

WIT

CH

TV +

AU

DIO

TV -

CO

MM

ON

6 5 4 3 2 1

BLU

E

GR

EE

NY

ELL

OW

OR

AN

GE

RE

DB

RO

WN

6 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RIR

300A

STA

TIO

N

+12

VD

C

CA

LL L

ED

INP

UT

CA

L L IN

PU

T +1

2 V

DC

CA

NC

EL

INP

UT

+12

VD

C

+ A

UD

IO O

UT

- AU

DIO

OU

T

6 5 4 3 2 1

BLU

E

GR

EE

NY

ELL

OW

OR

AN

GE

RE

DB

RO

WN

6 P

IN C

ON

NE

CTO

RIR

311A

, IR

312A

STA

TIO

N

CA

LL L

ED

INP

UT

CO

NTR

OL

(PM

311C

/PM

312C

ON

LY)

RA

DIO

OU

TPU

T +1

2 V

DC

TV O

N/O

FF S

WIT

CH

TV +

AU

DIO

TV C

OM

MO

N

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IR30

0 M

ultip

urpo

se S

tatio

n S

erie

s W

iring

Rev

7 09

2509

1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 116: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

104 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

39

—N

C3

51

(A)

Se

ria

l C

on

ne

cti

on

Dia

gra

m

RE

CE

IVE

DA

TATR

AN

SM

IT D

ATA

RTS

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

3 4 5

DB

9 FE

MA

LE C

ON

NE

CTO

RP

M35

3 M

ICR

OP

RO

CE

SS

OR

SE

RIA

L C

AR

DS

ER

IAL

PO

RT

DB

9 FE

MA

LE C

ON

NE

CTO

RP

M35

3 M

ICR

OP

RO

CE

SS

OR

SE

RIA

L C

AR

DS

ER

IAL

PO

RT

1 3 7

GR

OU

ND

RE

CE

IVE

DA

TA

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

DB

25 M

ALE

CO

NN

EC

TOR

MM

AR

S S

YS

TEM

PC

I CA

RD

DB

25 F

EM

ALE

CO

NN

EC

TOR

PR

INTE

R S

ER

IAL

PO

RT

NC

351(

A) C

PE

DB

25 C

ON

NE

CTO

RR

S23

2 S

ER

IAL

OU

TPU

T96

00 B

AU

D, 8

DA

TA B

ITS

, 1 S

TOP

BIT

SE

RIA

L C

AB

LEM

AX

. LE

NG

TH 1

00 F

T.

INS

ER

T A

RE

CE

IVE

DA

TATR

AN

SM

IT D

ATA

RTS

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

2 3 4

DB

9 FE

MA

LE C

ON

NE

CTO

RP

M35

3 M

ICR

OP

RO

CE

SS

OR

SE

RIA

L C

AR

DS

ER

IAL

PO

RT

3 2 8 1,7

TRA

NS

MIT

DA

TAR

EC

EIV

E D

ATA

DC

DS

IGN

AL

GR

OU

ND

DB

9 FE

MA

LE C

ON

NE

CTO

RS

CO

PE

RA

DIO

PA

GIN

G S

YS

TEM

2

5

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

NC

351(

A) S

eria

l Wiri

ng R

ev0

0420

04 1

Not

e: F

or p

hysi

cal l

ocat

ion

of C

E p

orts

refe

r to

NC

300I

I Sys

tem

Con

nect

ion

Dia

gram

in th

is s

ectio

n

1 2 3 5 7

1 2 3 5 7

CH

AS

SIS

GR

OU

ND

RE

CE

IVE

DA

TATR

AN

SM

IT D

ATA

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

DR

TS

CH

AS

SIS

GR

OU

ND

TRA

NS

MIT

DA

TAR

EC

EIV

E D

ATA

CTS

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

RE

CE

IVE

DA

TATR

AN

SM

IT D

ATA

RTS

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

2 3 4 5

DB

9 FE

MA

LE C

ON

NE

CTO

RP

M35

3 M

ICR

OP

RO

CE

SS

OR

SE

RIA

L C

AR

DS

ER

IAL

PO

RT

3 2 20 1,7

TRA

NS

MIT

DA

TAR

EC

EIV

E D

ATA

DTR

SIG

NA

L G

RO

UN

D

DB

25 F

EM

ALE

CO

NN

EC

TOR

MM

AR

S S

YS

TEM

CO

NN

EC

TOR

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 117: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 105Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

40

—N

C3

51

/2 I

nte

rna

l H

ard

wa

re D

iag

ram

PK

351B

POW

ER

SU

PPL

Y C

ON

NE

CT

OR

14 P

IN C

ON

NE

CT

OR

+24 VDC ADJUSTMENT+5 VDC ADJUSTMENT

PK

351B

115

VA

C C

ON

NE

CT

OR

See

oth

er v

iew

for

mor

e in

form

atio

nab

out p

ower

sup

ply.

Top

view

of P

K35

1B.

3

2

1

PM

352

PM

352

PM

354

PM

354

PM

355

LED

(Bel

ow M

aste

r S

eek)

115

VA

C C

ON

NE

CTO

R

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLYCONTAINS POTENTIALLY LETHAL VOLTAGES!

PK

305/

A C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

PO

INT

PM

353

PM

362

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

EA

GC

AG

CA

GC

AG

C

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

TES

:

1.

NC

351/

2 E

XP

AN

DE

D S

YS

TEM

SH

OW

N.

NC

351

STA

ND

AR

D S

YS

TEM

CO

NTA

INS

ON

E P

M35

2 C

IRC

UIT

BO

AR

D A

ND

ON

E P

M35

4

C

IRC

UIT

BO

AR

D

2. K

EY

SW

ITC

H U

SE

D T

O E

NA

BLE

FIR

MW

AR

E R

EP

RO

GR

AM

MIN

G.

T

UR

N R

IGH

T (H

OR

IZO

NTA

L) T

O E

NA

BLE

RE

PR

OG

RA

MM

ING

.

TU

RN

LE

FT (V

ER

TIC

LE) F

OR

NO

RM

AL

OP

ER

ATI

ON

.

FI

RM

WA

RE

RE

PR

OG

RA

MM

ING

SH

OU

LD O

NLY

BE

DO

NE

UN

DE

R T

HE

DIR

EC

TIO

N O

F TH

E

SY

STE

M A

DM

INIS

TRA

TOR

!!!

IND

ICA

TES

PO

TEN

TIO

ME

TER

LOC

ATE

D L

OW

ER

ON

CIR

CU

IT B

OA

RD

NO

TE:M

aste

r S

eek

butt

on(B

elow

Key

switc

h)

VE

RT.

DIP

SW

ITC

H

HO

RIZ

. DIP

SW

ITC

H

NO

TE:

RE

FER

EN

CE

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NFI

GU

RA

TIO

N A

ND

SE

TTIN

GS

SE

CTI

ON

FO

RD

IPS

WIT

CH

SE

TTIN

GS

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

NC

351

Inte

rnal

Wiri

ng R

ev4

0512

04 1

Not

e: N

oise

, AG

C a

nd V

olum

eco

ntro

ls a

re fa

ctor

y se

t. Th

eyar

e m

arke

d on

this

dra

win

g fo

rre

fere

nce

durin

g te

chni

cal

supp

ort.

Do

not a

djus

t the

mw

ithou

t ass

ista

nce

from

tech

nica

l sup

port

staf

f.

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 118: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

106 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

40

a—

NC

35

1(A

)/2

In

tern

al

Ha

rdw

are

Dia

gra

m

See

oth

er v

iew

for

mor

e in

form

atio

nab

out p

ower

sup

ply.

Top

view

of P

K35

7

PM

352

PM

352

PM

354

PM

354

PM

355

LED

(Bel

ow M

aste

r S

eek)

115

VA

C C

ON

NE

CTO

R

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLYCONTAINS POTENTIALLY LETHAL VOLTAGES!

PK

305/

A C

ON

NE

CTI

ON

PO

INT

PM

353

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

E

VO

LUM

EA

GC

AG

CA

GC

AG

C

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

ISE

NO

TES

:

1.

NC

351A

/2 E

XP

AN

DE

D S

YS

TEM

SH

OW

N.

NC

351A

STA

ND

AR

D S

YS

TEM

CO

NTA

INS

ON

E P

M35

2 C

IRC

UIT

BO

AR

D A

ND

ON

E P

M35

4

C

IRC

UIT

BO

AR

D

2. K

EY

SW

ITC

H U

SE

D T

O E

NA

BLE

FIR

MW

AR

E R

EP

RO

GR

AM

MIN

G.

T

UR

N R

IGH

T (H

OR

IZO

NTA

L) T

O E

NA

BLE

RE

PR

OG

RA

MM

ING

.

TU

RN

LE

FT (V

ER

TIC

AL)

FO

R N

OR

MA

L O

PE

RA

TIO

N.

FIR

MW

AR

E R

EP

RO

GR

AM

MIN

G S

HO

ULD

ON

LYB

E D

ON

E U

ND

ER

TH

E D

IRE

CTI

ON

OF

THE

S

YS

TEM

AD

MIN

ISTR

ATO

R!!

!

IND

ICA

TES

PO

TEN

TIO

ME

TER

LOC

ATE

D L

OW

ER

ON

CIR

CU

IT B

OA

RD

NO

TE:M

aste

r S

eek

butt

on(B

elow

Key

switc

h)

VE

RT.

DIP

SW

ITC

H

HO

RIZ

. DIP

SW

ITC

H

NO

TE:

RE

FER

EN

CE

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NFI

GU

RA

TIO

N A

ND

SE

TTIN

GS

SE

CTI

ON

FO

RD

IPS

WIT

CH

SE

TTIN

GS

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

NC

351A

/2 In

tern

al W

iring

Rev

2 08

2305

1

Not

e: N

oise

, AG

C a

nd V

olum

eco

ntro

ls a

re fa

ctor

y se

t. Th

eyar

e m

arke

d on

this

dra

win

g fo

rre

fere

nce

durin

g te

chni

cal

supp

ort.

Do

not a

djus

t the

mw

ithou

t ass

ista

nce

from

tech

nica

l sup

port

staf

f.

SU

RG

E S

UP

PR

ES

SO

R

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 119: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 107Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

41

—N

C3

51

(A)/

2 E

xp

an

de

d S

ys

tem

Ex

plo

de

d I

nte

rna

l W

irin

g D

iag

ram

(Com

pone

nt S

ide)

PM

354

Fiel

d I/O

1

PM

352

(Com

pone

nt S

ide)

Mas

ter I

/O 1

(Com

pone

nt S

ide)

PM

354

PM

352

(Com

pone

nt S

ide)

Mas

ter I

/O 2

Fiel

d I/O

2

PM

355

(Com

pone

nt S

ide)

RE

SE

T

IRQ

LED PM

355

Inse

rt A

Mas

ter

Por

t 3

Mas

ter

Por

t 4

Mas

ter

Por

t 7

Mas

ter

Por

t 8Fi

eld

Por

t 3

Fiel

d P

ort 4

Fiel

d P

ort 7

Fiel

d P

ort 8

Mas

ter

Por

t 3

Mas

ter

Por

t 4

TO

PM

355

(see

Inse

rt A

)

CT3

51 C

able

CT3

51 C

able

CT3

51 C

able

CT3

51 C

able

CT3

70 C

able

CT3

52 C

able

CT3

52 C

able

CT3

53 C

able

CT3

53 C

able

CT353 Cable

CT3

54 C

able

CT3

54 C

able

Add

ition

alM

aste

r I/O

P

orts

CT3

67 C

able

CT3

67 C

able

CT3

67 C

able

CT3

67 C

able

Add

ition

alFi

eld

I/O

Por

ts

Add

ition

alFi

eld

I/O

Por

ts

CT3

67 C

onne

ctor

s ar

e ke

yed

CT3

67 C

onne

ctor

s ar

e ke

yed

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

NC

351(

A)/2

Inte

rnal

Wir

Exp

lode

d R

ev4

0420

04 1

CT3

70 C

able

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 120: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

108 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

42

—P

M3

52

an

d P

M3

54

Ju

mp

er

Se

ttin

gs

Mas

ter I

/O #

1

Mas

ter I

/O #

2

Fiel

d I/O

# 1

Fiel

d I/O

# 2

PM

354

PM

354

PM

352

PM

352

=

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

PM

352

PM

354

Car

d S

ettin

gs R

ev1

0423

02 1

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 121: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 109Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

43

—S

F3

80

C C

on

ne

cti

on

s t

o P

eri

ph

era

l D

ev

ice

s

P2

8 P

IN

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NS

SF3

41B

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

8 7 6 5 4 2 1R

ED

BR

OW

N

6 5 4 3 2 1B

RO

WN

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

To N

C35

1(A

) (IL

715)

or N

C35

0C (I

L421

) Ser

ies

CE

SF3

80C

Sta

tion

P1

6 P

IN

3

SE

E D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

5 05

1002

1 F

OR

SP

EC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

7 6 5 4 2 13

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

37C

/SF3

40B

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

SF33

7C O

NL

Y!

Com

mon

& P

erip

hera

lC

onne

ctor

s

LI38

2 D

ome

Lam

p

+12

VD

C

Cod

e A

(Pw

r.)

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

Bat

h

Whi

te L

amp

Red

Lam

p

LED

Driv

er

NO

TE

: Bot

h ju

mpe

rs o

n ba

ck o

f sta

tion

need

to b

e in

dow

n po

siti

on! P

in 7

onl

yex

ists

on

SF33

7C!

RE

D

WH

ITE

Smok

e D

etec

tor C

onta

cts

(Nor

mal

ly O

pen)

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

+12

VD

C

+12

VD

C

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

Bat

hB

ath

Alt

erna

te C

onta

ct C

onfi

gura

tion

(1N

4003

Dio

des

Use

d &

Con

tact

is N

orm

ally

Ope

n)

--O

R--

+ 24

VD

C

N/C

SF3

37C

/SF3

40B

WIT

HO

UT

CO

DE

STA

TIO

N

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IL42

1 S

F380

C W

iring

Rev

5 04

2004

1

NO

TE

: FIR

E I

ND

ICA

TIO

N A

T T

HE

NU

RSE

MA

STE

R I

S SU

PPL

EM

EN

TA

RY

ON

LY

.

T

HE

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

(IL

421)

or

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

II (

IL71

5) S

YST

EM

IS

NO

T I

NT

EN

DE

D F

OR

USE

AS

A F

IRE

AL

AR

M E

VA

CU

AT

ION

SY

STE

M.

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 122: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

110 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

44

—S

F3

80

P C

on

ne

cti

on

s t

o P

eri

ph

era

l D

ev

ice

s

P2

8 P

IN

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

6 5 4 3 2 1B

RO

WN

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

SF3

80P

Sta

tion P1

8 P

IN

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

7 6 5 4 2 13

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

37C

/SF3

40B

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

SF33

7C O

NL

Y!

Com

mon

& P

erip

hera

lC

onne

ctor

s

LI38

2 D

ome

Lam

p

+12

VD

C

N/C

Nur

se

Bat

h

Whi

te L

amp

Gre

en L

amp

LED

Driv

er

NO

TE

: Bot

h ju

mpe

rs o

n ba

ck o

f sta

tion

need

to b

e in

dow

n po

sitio

n! P

in 7

onl

yex

ists

on

SF33

7C!

GR

EE

N

WH

ITE

+12

VD

C

Bat

h

+ 24

VD

C

N/C

SF2

50P

RE

SE

NC

E S

TATI

ON

BR

OW

N

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

2 134Y

ELL

OW

GR

EE

N

BLU

E6 5

Nur

se

O N1

23

45

67

Switc

h "O

N"

= V

alue

1

=

12

=

2

3

=

44

=

8

6

=

327

=

n

ot u

sed

5

=

16

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IL42

1 S

F380

P W

iring

Rev

4 04

2004

1

NO

TE

: FIR

E I

ND

ICA

TIO

N A

T T

HE

NU

RSE

MA

STE

R I

S SU

PPL

EM

EN

TA

RY

ON

LY

.

T

HE

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

(IL

421)

or

TE

K-C

AR

NC

300™

II (

IL71

5) S

YST

EM

IS

NO

T I

NT

EN

DE

D F

OR

USE

AS

A F

IRE

AL

AR

M E

VA

CU

AT

ION

SY

STE

M.

To N

C35

1(A

) (IL

715)

or N

C35

0C (I

L421

) Ser

ies

CE

SE

E D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

5 05

1002

1 F

OR

SP

EC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 123: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 111Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

45

—S

F3

81

/SF

38

2 W

irin

g D

iag

ram

RE

D

BR

OW

N

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLESF3

81/S

F382

Sta

tion

P1

8 P

IN

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

Con

nect

ions

LI38

2 D

ome

Lam

p

Whi

te L

amp

Red

Lam

p

RE

D

WH

ITE

+ 24

VD

C

O N1

23

45

67

Switc

h "O

N"

= V

alue

1

=

12

=

2

3

=

44

=

8

6

=

327

=

n

ot u

sed

5

=

16

PU

RP

LE

GR

AY

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

715

IL42

1 S

F381

SF3

82 W

iring

Rev

3 04

2004

1

TOP

Jum

per (

Shu

nt) S

ettin

gs

To N

C35

1(A

) (IL

715)

or N

C35

0C (I

L421

) Ser

ies

CE

SE

E D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

Rev

5 05

1002

1 F

OR

SP

EC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

NO

TE: T

o re

duce

dra

win

g co

mpl

exity

,co

nnec

tions

sho

wn

in d

raw

ing

do n

otne

cess

arily

refle

ct p

hysi

cal p

lace

men

tor

orie

ntat

ion!

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 124: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

112 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

46

—K

ey

pa

d f

or

NC

30

6

DR

AW

ING

#: IL

715

ST0

97 K

-P Z

ON

ES

RE

V0

0213

02 2

PO

WE

R O

NFA

ULT

PR

IOR

ITY

PR

IOR

ITY

PR

IVA

CY

FOLL

OW

STA

FF

ZON

E

PA

GE

RE

SE

T

TALK

0 21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9JIHGFEDA B C

K L M N O P

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 125: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 113Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

47—

SF

380A

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

mN

OTE

: To

redu

ce d

raw

ing

com

plex

ity, c

onne

ctio

ns s

how

n in

draw

ing

do n

ot n

eces

saril

y re

flect

phys

ical

pla

cem

ent o

r orie

ntat

ion!

O N1

23

45

67

1

=

12

=

2

3

=

44

=

8

6

=

327

=

See

righ

t

5

=

16

DIP

SWIT

CH

#7

SET

TIN

GS

Switc

h "O

N"

= V

alue

ON

= L

AM

P FA

UL

T

Dra

win

g N

ame

& N

umbe

r: IL

884

IL71

5 IL

421

SF3

80A

Wiri

ng R

ev2

01/2

8/09

1

J3 8

PIN

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NS

SF3

41B

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

8 7 6 5 4 2 1R

ED

BR

OW

N

6 5 4 3 2 1B

RO

WN

RE

D

OR

AN

GE

YE

LLO

W

GR

EE

N

BLU

E

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CO

MM

ON

CA

BLE

SF3

80A

Sta

tion

J1 6

PIN

3

SE

E D

WG

IL71

5 B

lock

Wiri

ng 1

FO

R S

PE

CIF

ICA

TIO

NS

+12

VD

C

DA

TA C

OM

DA

TA O

UT

DA

TA IN

NE

GA

TIV

E

+24

VD

C

7 6 5 4 2 13

BA

TH E

ME

RG

EN

CY

SF3

37C

/SF3

40B

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

RE

D

BR

OW

NC

omm

on &

Per

iphe

ral

Con

nect

ors

Dom

e La

mp

+12

VD

C

Cod

e A

(Pw

r.)

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

Bat

h

Whi

te L

amp

Red

Lam

p

LED

Driv

er

RE

D

WH

ITE

Smok

e D

etec

tor C

onta

cts

(Nor

mal

ly O

pen)

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

+12

VD

C

+12

VD

C

Cod

e B

(Inp

ut)

Bat

hB

ath

Alte

rnat

e C

onta

ct C

onfi

gura

tion

(1N

4003

Dio

des

Use

d &

Con

tact

is N

orm

ally

Ope

n)

--O

R--

+ 24

VD

C

Lam

p S

uper

visi

on

SF3

37C

/SF3

40B

WIT

HO

UT

CO

DE

STA

TIO

N

NO

TE

: FIR

E I

ND

ICA

TIO

N A

T T

HE

NU

RSE

MA

STE

R I

S SU

PPL

EM

EN

TA

RY

ON

LY

.

T

HE

TE

K-C

AR

NU

RSE

CA

LL

SY

STE

M I

S N

OT

IN

TE

ND

ED

FOR

USE

AS

A F

IRE

AL

AR

M E

VA

CU

AT

ION

SY

STE

M.

To N

C35

1(A

) (IL

715)

or N

C35

0C (I

L421

) Ser

ies

CE

OFF

= L

AM

P FA

UL

T

DO

ME

LA

MP

GR

AY

PU

RP

LE

BLU

E

GR

EE

N

YE

LLO

W

OR

AN

GE

8 7 6 5 4 2 1

RE

D

BR

OW

N

3

+ 24

VD

CLI

382

LI38

4A

sens

ing

DIS

AB

LE

D

sens

ing

EN

AB

LE

D

SF3

37C

ON

LY!

NO

TE: B

oth

jum

pers

on

in d

own

posi

tion!

Pin

7on

ly e

xist

s on

SF3

37C

!

back

of s

tatio

n ne

ed to

be

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 126: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

114 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

48

—L

I48

4L

ED

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

= P

IN #

1RE

AR

VIE

W

IL715 L

I484LE

D P

INO

UT

RE

V1 1

00810.d

c

** I

R3

00

-se

rie

s P

IN 6

ON

15

PIN

HE

AD

ER

SF

38

0A

PIN

7 O

N 8

PIN

HE

AD

ER

BL

UE

(L

AM

P F

AU

LT

) **

GR

EE

N

(RE

D D

OM

E)

YE

LL

OW

(G

RE

EN

DO

ME

)O

RA

NG

E

(AM

BE

R D

OM

E)

RE

D

(WH

ITE

DO

ME

)

BR

OW

N

("P

" /

+2

4V

DC

)

BL

AC

K

( N

EG

AT

IVE

)

WIR

E C

OLO

R

(FU

NC

TIO

N)

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 127: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual • 115Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

49

—L

I38

0L

ED

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

(1) B

RO

WN

(2) R

ED

(3) O

RA

NG

E(4

) YE

LLO

W

(6) B

LUE

(5) G

RE

EN

GR

EE

N L

AM

PR

ED

LA

MP

LAM

P F

AU

LT

OR

AN

GE

LA

MP

WH

ITE

LA

MP

+24V

WIR

E C

OLO

R

FU

NC

TIO

N

LI38

0LE

D(R

EA

R V

IEW

)

IL715 LI380LED WIRING REV0 072610

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414

Page 128: Tek-CARE NC300 II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... · PDF fileTek-CARE® NC300™II Microprocessor Nurse Call System UL ... It utilizes microprocessor based technology to provide

116 • IL715 Tek-CARE® NC300™II Manual Copyright © TekTone Sound & Signal Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Fig

ure

50

—L

I38

6L

ED

Wir

ing

Dia

gra

m

CO

MM

ON

S B

US

C

OM

MO

NS

BU

S

CO

MM

ON

S B

US

C

OM

MO

NS

BU

S

CO

MM

ON

S B

US

C

OM

MO

NS

BU

S

(1) B

RO

WN

(2) R

ED

(3) O

RA

NG

E

(4) Y

ELL

OW

(6) B

LUE

(5) G

RE

EN

N.C

.

CO

M

N.O

.

SF3

40B

STA

FFE

ME

RG

EN

CY

DO

ME

LI38

6LE

D

BROWN

RED

ORANGE

YELLOW

GREEN

BLUE

VIOLETC

OD

E B

CO

DE

A

LED

SIN

K

+12V

(1) B

RO

WN

(2) R

ED

(3) O

RA

NG

E

(4) Y

ELL

OW

(6) B

LUE

(5) G

RE

EN

SF3

37C

/ S

F339

(7) V

IOLE

T

N.C

.

CO

M

N.O

.

(1) B

RO

WN

(2) R

ED

(3) O

RA

NG

E

(4) Y

ELL

OW

(6) B

LUE

(7) V

IOLE

T

(8) G

RA

Y

(5) G

RE

EN

N.C

.

CO

M

N.O

.

SF3

41B

CO

DE

STA

TIO

NB

ATH

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y

CO

DE

B

CO

DE

A

LED

SIN

K

+12V

LED

SIN

K

+12V

EM

ER

GE

NC

YE

ME

RG

EN

CY

BA

THB

ATH

SM

OK

E

DP

DT

SP

DT

(US

E 1

N40

03 D

IOD

ES

)

- AN

D /

OR

-

DO

NO

T C

ON

NE

CT

(GR

AY

)

DO

NO

T C

ON

NE

CT

(VIO

LET)

+12V

DC

(B

LUE

)

DA

TA C

OM

(G

RE

EN

)

DA

TA O

UT

(YE

LLO

W)

DA

TA IN

(O

RA

NG

E)

NE

GA

TIV

E (

RE

D)

+24V

DC

(B

RO

WN

)

NOTE: NEW WIRING SEQUENCE

**

IL71

5 LI

386L

ED

WIR

ING

RE

V0

1222

10

www.leedan.com [email protected] Toll-Free: 1-800-231-1414